pcs 7.6.1 cpdm admin/users guide

292
Pipeline Compliance System Version 7.6 Cathodic Protection Data Manager User and Administrator Guide

Upload: dangquynh

Post on 01-Jan-2017

245 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

Pipeline Compliance System Version 7.6

Cathodic Protection Data Manager User and Administrator Guide

Page 2: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

Information in this document is subject to change without notice.

© 1999-2014 American Innovations, Ltd. All rights reserved.American Innovations | www.aiworldwide.com | 12211 Technology Blvd | Austin, TX 78727

Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of American Innovations is strictly forbidden.

The American Innovations logo and icon are trademarks of American Innovations, Ltd. Pipeline Compliance System (PCS) is a trademark of American Innovations. Allegro Field PC is a registered trademark of Juniper Systems, Inc.

Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to CPDMeither the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. American Innovations, Ltd. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.

January 26, 2014

Page 3: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

Contents

Chapter 1Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

About PCS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Contacting Technical Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

Chapter 2Setting Up PCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

System Hierarchy and Company Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Creating the System Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11Setting User Location Name and Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12Description of System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Bridge System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14Bullhorn System Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15Criteria System Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17E-mail System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18Editing System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19Field Computer System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22General System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Hierarchy System Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25Replication System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Report System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Security System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Creating a Record for a New Pipeline Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Custom Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

About Custom Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Adding a Custom Module with Custom Facility Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Deleting a Custom Module or Custom Facility Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Custom Facility Types in PCS Installed Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Adding a Custom Facility Type in a PCS Installed Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Deleting a Custom Facility Type in a PCS Installed Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

iii

Page 4: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Field and UDF Customizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44User-Defined Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

To create a UDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45To add a UDF to a grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Enabled Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48To create an enabled expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Range Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50Setting Properties for Inherited Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Field Captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Validation Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

System and Hierarchical Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60To enable system security and hierarchical security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61To create a new security group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62To add a user to a security group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64To assign user access privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65To assign grid rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67To assign data field rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68To assign system settings rights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Hierarchical Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70Pipeline Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

To create and apply a pipeline series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72Themes and Themes Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Applying a Theme to a Grid or Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76Creating a Layout Theme for a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77Creating a Sorting Method Theme for a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79Creating a Report Layout Theme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80Managing Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

E-mail Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83About Email Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84Setting Properties in System Settings for Email Notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85Email Notification Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Setting properties in Email Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86Assigning an event notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88Setting properties for email client and event report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Regenerating Emails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92Viewing the Email Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92Disabling Email Notifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

iv Contents

Page 5: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Chapter 3Using Grids and Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Grids and Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95Grid Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Column Heading Color Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97Grid Button Bar Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97Mini-Grid Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Form Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Working with a Grid and Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Form Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Creating a Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Open the form designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Create a new form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Import an existing form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Set up form size and color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Add controls and fields in a form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Arrange items in a form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Export a form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Set Up a Grid or Form for Data Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Choose a layout and sorting theme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Choose which records to display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Create a layout theme from an existing theme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Use facility manager in a grid or form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Set up search in a grid or form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Chapter 4Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Schedule Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Schedule Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Set up schedule criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Create a schedule definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Print a PCS Schedule Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Set up report options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Set up report layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Generate a Schedule for Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Transfer a Schedule to the Allegro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Contents v

Page 6: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Chapter 5Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Routes Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Create a New Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Set Up Customize Prompts and Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Transfer a Route to the Allegro Field PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Print a Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Print a CPDM Data Collection Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Print a Route Definition or Unrouted Facilities Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Import or Export a Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Build a Route for Allegro Timed Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Enable Timed Reading Fields in Field and UDF Customizations . . . . . . . . . . 131Add Timed Reading Fields in the Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Define a New Route for a Timed Readings Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Set Up Customize Prompts and Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Transfer the Route to the Allegro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Build a Route for Allegro Inspection GPS Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Enable Inspection GPS Fields in Field & UDF Customizations . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Add Inspection GPS fields in a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Define a New Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Set Up Customize Prompts and Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Transfer a Route to the Allegro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Chapter 6Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Bridge System Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Bridge Transition File Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Using an External System ID in Bridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

To create a UDF for an external system ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Setting Up Import and Export Definition Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

To set up an import definition file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150To set up an export definition file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154To set up an import and export definition file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Running Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162To run a Bridge definition and view the log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162To print a Bridge definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

vi Contents

Page 7: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Chapter 7Field Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Sending a Facility Survey Based on Selected ROWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Sending a Facility Survey Based on a Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Sending a Facility Survey Based on a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Sending a Facility Survey Based on an Exported List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Sending a Facility Survey Based on Open Maintenance Items . . . . . . . . . . . 175Receiving a Facility Survey from the Allegro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Receiving a Continuous Survey from the Allegro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Working with Themes and Filter Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Adding a Prompt Theme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Adding a Sorting Theme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Adding an AND Filter Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Adding an OR Filter Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Viewing the Field Computer Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Chapter 8Bullhorn Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193

System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Matching PCS and BAT Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Importing a BAT Extract Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Chapter 9Reports and Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

CPDM Reports Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Manage data collection and data entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Review data quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Provide information for an audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Determine the effectiveness of a maintenance program. . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Report Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Base and Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Report Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Custom Columnar Report Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Custom Summary Report Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Custom Form Report Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Custom Graph Report Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Set up report options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Set up report layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Export the report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

My Favorite Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Contents vii

Page 8: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Chapter 10Two-Way Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Two-way Sync Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Process for Setting Up Two-way Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Create and Manage Replica Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Create a new replica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Delete a replica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Backup Replica Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Synchronize Replicas with the Master Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Chapter 11Managing the Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

Backup and Restore the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232To backup the PCS database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232To restore the PCS database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Database Cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Import and Export Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Export PCS data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Export PCS system items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Import PCS data or system items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Data Modification Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Move Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Mass Create Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Shift Mileposts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Data Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Error Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Appendix AField Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

Appendix BFAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279

viii Contents

Page 9: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

1

Getting Started

Information in this manual explains how to use the Pipeline Compliance System (PCSTM) software to manage and report pipeline and facility cathodic protection (CP) data. The information is intended for both users and system administrators.

Topics covered in this chapter include those in the following list:

• About PCS (page 2)

• Contacting Technical Services (page 5)

NOTE: Field names and report layouts described in this manual use PCS default settings. If you have difficulty with a procedure in this document because field names are different, use the following steps to display field names with default and custom descriptions: (1) Click Help in the PCS main menu. (2) Click Show Original Grid Captions.

1

Page 10: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

About PCSPCS is a database software program used worldwide by distribution and transmission companies to manage pipeline integrity and compliance data.

PCS uses a central database to manage data stored in one or more PCS modules. All modules share a common interface making it easier to work with data regardless of which module you use. PCS modules are based on common industry practices and various Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations, including DOT 192 titled Transportation of Natural Gas and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Standards Safety and DOT 195 titled Transportation of Hazardous Liquids by Pipeline. See the next figure for an illustrated overview of PCS (Figure 1-1).

Figure 1-1. PCS Overview

2 Getting Started

Page 11: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

PCS modules are purchased separately or as a package (Table 1-1). Modules and certain system functions such as Two-way Synchronization, Bridge, Bullhorn Interface, and Email Notification become operational after entering the software activation key (provided by AI) when running PCS (Tools > Activation Key).

Table 1-1. PCS Modules

Name Description

Cathodic Protection Data Manager (CPDM)

CPDM manages cathodic protection (CP) data for facility types such as test points, rectifiers, foreign bonds, galvanic anodes, and tanks. Distribution and transmission companies use this module to manage and track corrosion data as well as other types of corrosion-related data.

Indirect Survey Manager (ISM)

ISM manages and analyzes indirect survey data. The module supports the following indirect survey types: Close Interval (CI), Direct Current Voltage Gradient (DCVG), Alternating Current Voltage Gradient (ACVG), AC Current Attenuation (ACCA), Soil Resistivity, and Pearson.

ISM provides electronic management of thousands of data points and eliminates the need for stacks of hard-copy printouts. You can import data from the Allegro Field PC, electronic spreadsheet, or with the PCS Bridge feature. Survey data can also be exported from ISM to be used with other software programs. ISM replaces the Close Interval Survey Manager (CISM) module previously available in earlier versions of the PCS software.

Valve Manager (VM) VM module manages valve inspection and repair data. The module provides compliance scheduling, data management, and reporting of valve information.

Atmospheric Corrosion Manager (ACM)

ACM module manages atmospheric corrosion data as required by US DOT 192 and 195 regulations.

In-Line Inspection Manager (ILIM)

ILIM module manages in-line inspection data, correlates anomalies to annual and close interval survey readings, and manages resulting visual inspection data.

Internal Corrosion Manager (ICM)

ICM module tracks internal corrosion data in compliance with US DOT 192 and 195 regulations. ICM supports facility types such as inhibitor injectors, coupons, samples, and probes.

Getting Started 3

Page 12: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Pressure Control Manager (PCM)

PCM module manages inspection data for pressure control devices such as pressure regulators and relief valves. The module provides compliance scheduling, data management, and reporting of pressure control devices.

Patrol and Leak Survey Manager (PLSM)

PLSM module manages inspection data, compliance scheduling, and reporting of patrol information as required by DOT 192. The module manages and provides compliance scheduling for leak surveys, classifies leak and repair data, crossings, population classification (pop class) and supports follow-up activities.

Leak Survey Manager (LSM)

LSM manages and provides compliance scheduling for leak surveys, classifies leaks and repair data, and supports follow-up activities.

Pipeline Inspection Manager (PIM

PIM manages bellhole inspection data collected at a pipeline dig site. The module provides collection, management, and reporting of dig site and pipeline inspection data, such as soil characteristics, pipe condition, damage and defect identification, and pipe maintenance.

Custom Module Management (CMM)

CMM allows you to set up and use a custom-built module for data management and reporting. With CMM, you can set up and use a custom module that allows you to manage and schedule any facility type; such as electrical power poles and safety equipment, or facility assets such as ladders and fire extinguishers.

Based on the software activation key issued when you purchase PCS, the maximum number of facility types supported by CMM is 1, 6, 12, or unlimited. CMM also supports the same functionality available in other PCS modules. This includes data entry grids and forms, themes, routes, schedules, reports, Bridge, field computer, user-defined fields (UDFs), range checking, and two-way synchronization.

Table 1-1. PCS Modules (continued)

Name Description

4 Getting Started

Page 13: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Contacting Technical ServicesIf you need assistance with PCS, or have a comment or suggestion about this manual, contact Technical Services in any of the following ways:

Telephone: 1-800-229-3404 (select 1, then press 2)

E-mail: [email protected]

Mail: American Innovations, Ltd.Attn. PCS Technical Services12211 Technology Blvd.Austin, TX 78727

Getting Started 5

Page 14: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Notes

6 Getting Started

Page 15: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

2

Setting Up PCS

Information in this chapter explains how to setup PCS for operation. Topics include those in the following list:

• System Hierarchy and Company Name

• System Settings (page 11)

• Creating a Record for a New Pipeline Segment (page 31)

• Custom Modules (page 36)

• Custom Facility Types in PCS Installed Modules (page 41)

• Field and UDF Customizations (page 44)

• Validation Tables (page 58)

• Security (page 60)

• Pipeline Series (page 72)

• Themes and Themes Management (page 75)

• E-mail Notification (page 83)

7

Page 16: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

System Hierarchy and Company NameBefore you begin entering data in PCS, you first need to establish the system hierarchy and enter your company’s name. The hierarchy determines how PCS organizes data. The company name displays at the top of all reports and graphs.

You can create a hierarchy that reflects how your company categorizes its pipeline system. For example, you may want to create a hierarchy based on one or more of the following criteria: division, district, county, right-of-way (ROW), section map, or names of field technicians.

PCS supports a hierarchy structure with up to five (5) levels. The top hierarchy level includes either your company’s name or other type of descriptor. Hierarchy name, ROW Code, and ROW Name each support up to 100 characters. The following figure shows a hierarchy structure with four (4) hierarchy levels (Figure 2-1).

See Creating the System Hierarchy (page 9) for more information.

IMPORTANT: After entering data in the database, it is recommended that you not change the hierarchy structure.

Figure 2-1. Example of Hierarchy Structure

8 Setting Up PCS

Page 17: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Creating the System HierarchyTo create the system hierarchy, follow these steps:

1 Start PCS and then click Tools > System Settings > Hierarchy.

2 In the Setting column for the field labeled Hierarchy levels in the system, identify how many levels to include in the hierarchy by clicking the down arrow and selecting 2 Levels, 3 Levels, 4 Levels, or 5 Levels (Figure 2-2).

NOTE: When you first install PCS, ROW and Category are the default settings for hierarchy level 1 and level 2 respectively.

3 In the Setting column for the field labeled Level 1 name, type a name for hierarchy level 1. For example, type ROW or Segment to refer to pipelines in the system.

Hierarchy name as well as ROW Code and ROW Name support up to 100 characters

4 Repeat step 3 for each additional level in the hierarchy using the fields labeled Level 2 name through Level 5 name (Figure 2-2).

NOTE: Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. A check mark inside the check box indicates Export Setting is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

Figure 2-2. Hierarchy Levels 1-5 (System Settings)

Setting Up PCS 9

Page 18: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

5 Click the General tab (Figure 2-3).

6 In the Setting column for the field labeled Company name, type the name of your company or another type of descriptor as desired. The name you enter appears at the top of all reports and graphs.

Figure 2-3. Hierarchy Top Level - Company Name (System Settings)

10 Setting Up PCS

Page 19: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

System SettingsPCS uses System Settings to perform many functions across all modules, such as arranging data, performing calculations, generating reports, and allowing user-access to certain features. Required settings include Hierarchy levels, Company name, User location name, and Criteria.

Other required settings are applicable when using any of the following optional features in PCS:

• Two-way synchronization (Tools > Synchronize)

• Bullhorn interface (Tools > Bullhorn)

• Bridge (Tools > Bridge)

• E-mail notifications (Tools > Email)

The All tab in System Settings displays a list of all possible settings. Remaining tabs are organized based on system functionality or feature. For example, the Editing tab includes settings that apply when entering data while the Field Computer tab provides settings when using the Allegro Field PC with PCS.

Check boxes in the column labeled Export Setting allow you to either include or exclude one or more system settings in a PCS export file (File > Export Data) and when performing two-way synchronization with the master database and client replicas (Replication). To include a particular setting, click the check box to place a check mark inside the check box. To exclude a setting, click the check box again to remove the check mark.

NOTE: Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. It also allows PCS to include the setting in the export file when using the Export Data command (File > Export Data). A check mark inside the Export Setting check box indicates the option is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

The following topics provide additional information when working with System Settings:

• Setting User Location Name and Criteria (page 12)

• Description of System Settings (page 13)

Setting Up PCS 11

Page 20: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Setting User Location Name and CriteriaUse the following procedure as a guideline to setup System Settings. For a description of each system setting, refer to Description of System Settings (page 13).

To set properties for User Location Name and Criteria, follow these steps:

1 Click Tools > System Settings > General tab.

2 In the Setting column for User location name, highlight the default Milepost setting and then type a name for inspection locations along a pipeline. For example, type Station Number.

3 If you want to include the setting for User location name in a PCS export file or when performing two-way synchronization, click the adjacent check box in the Export Setting column to place a check mark inside the check box.

4 Click the Criteria tab.

5 In the Setting column for the field labeled Casing criteria: Maximum difference between P/S and C/S, type a number that specifies the maximum value allowed between pipe-to-soil (P/S) and casing-to-soil (C/S) readings before the casing is considered shorted.

6 If you want to include the setting for Casing Criteria in a PCS export file or when performing two-way synchronization, click the adjacent check box in the Export Setting column.

NOTE: Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. It also allows PCS to include the setting in the export file when using the Export Data command (File > Export Data). A check mark inside the Export Setting check box indicates the option is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

12 Setting Up PCS

Page 21: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Description of System SettingsA description for each property setting in System Settings is provided in the following sections:

• Bridge System Settings (page 14)

• Bullhorn System Settings (page 15)

• Criteria System Settings (page 17)

• E-mail System Settings (page 18)

• Editing System Settings (page 19)

• Field Computer System Settings (page 22)

• General System Settings (page 23)

• Hierarchy System Settings (page 25)

• Replication System Settings (page 27)

• Report System Settings (page 29)

• Security System Settings (page 30)

For an example of how to set properties in System Settings, refer to Setting User Location Name and Criteria (page 12).

Setting Up PCS 13

Page 22: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Bridge System SettingsThe following table provides a description of Bridge System Settings.

NOTE: Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. It also allows PCS to include the setting in the export file when using the Export Data command (File > Export Data). A check mark inside the Export Setting check box indicates the option is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

Table 2-1. Bridge System Settings

Setting Description

Time of day at which Bridge export is run

Using 24-hour time format, type the time of day to automatically run a PCS Bridge export on the server or computer that hosts the master database.This setting requires the optional two-way synchronization feature. Examples of 24-hour time format are 01:00 for 1AM and 13:00 for 1PM.

Time of day at which Bridge import is run

Using 24-hour time format, type the time of day to automatically run a PCS Bridge import on the server or computer that hosts the master database.This setting requires the optional two-way synchronization feature. Examples of 24-hour time format are 01:00 for 1AM and 13:00 for 1PM.

14 Setting Up PCS

Page 23: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Bullhorn System SettingsThe following table provides a description of Bullhorn System Settings.

NOTE: Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. It also allows PCS to include the setting in the export file when using the Export Data command (File > Export Data). A check mark inside the Export Setting check box indicates the option is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

Table 2-2. Bullhorn System Settings

Setting Description

American Innovations customer ID Type your Bullhorn client ID in this field. The client ID is assigned by AI and is used when logging in to your account on the Bullhorn Asset Tracker (BAT) website.

Assign Bullhorn Inspections to a Periodic Survey based on the Survey Date

Type your Bullhorn client ID in this field. The client ID is assigned by AI and is used when logging in to your account on the Bullhorn Asset Tracker (BAT) website.

Bullhorn FTP site URL Type the URL address of the FTP site that stores Bullhorn Super Extract reports. If you use the AI FTP site, type the FTP address assigned to you by AI. If you are not using the AI FTP site, type the FTP address provided by your IT network administrator. The FTP address is a unique FTP ID setup for an external FTP server by your IT network administrator.

Setting Up PCS 15

Page 24: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Bullhorn FTP site folder Type the name of the folder on the FTP site that stores Bullhorn Super Extract reports. If you use the AI FTP site, type the name of the folder assigned to you by AI. If you are not using the AI FTP site, type the name of the folder provided by your IT network administrator.

IMPORTANT: If you use an FTP folder provided by your IT network administrator, the FTP server must be set up in a manner that grants the Bullhorn server write privileges to the folder that stores Super Extract reports (.dat report files). Your IT network administrator must also grant you read/write privileges to the folder in order for you to manage report files (such as delete processed reports) and perform the Bullhorn interface function (Tools > Bullhorn > Bullhorn Interface) when importing Super Extract reports in PCS.

Bullhorn FTP site password Type the password that allows you access to the FTP site and the folder that stores Bullhorn Super Extract reports. If you use the AI FTP site, type the password provided to you by AI. If you do not use the AI FTP site, type the password provided to you by your IT network administrator.

Bullhorn FTP site username Type the user name (or user ID) that allows you access to the FTP site and the folder that stores Bullhorn Super Extract reports. If you use the AI FTP site, type the user name provided to you by AI. If you do not use the AI FTP site, type the user name provided to you by your IT network administrator.

Bullhorn download from a disk drive

Enable this option if you want to download Bullhorn Super Extract reports to PCS from a computer disk drive instead of an FTP site.

Enabling this option requires that you also set up the PCS system setting labeled Bullhorn download drive path.

Table 2-2. Bullhorn System Settings (continued)

Setting Description

16 Setting Up PCS

Page 25: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Criteria System SettingsThe following table provides a description of Criteria System Settings.

NOTE: Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. It also allows PCS to include the setting in the export file when using the Export Data command (File > Export Data). A check mark inside the Export Setting check box indicates the option is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

Table 2-3. Criteria System Settings

Setting Description

Casing criteria: Maximum difference between P/S and C/S

This field identifies the isolation criteria for casing inspections. Type a value in the field that identifies the maximum difference allowed between P/S (structure pipe-to-soil) and C/S (casing pipe-to-soil) readings before the casing is considered shorted. The default setting is 100 mV.

PCS displays a warning message when the maximum difference does not meet the casing criteria. If readings uploaded from the Allegro Field PC do not meet the casing criteria, PCS adds an entry in the field computer log.

Days to look forward from inspection for Native P/S

Entered number of days effects system calculation of grid fields labeled Effective Native P/S and Effective Native Date.

Setting Up PCS 17

Page 26: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

E-mail System SettingsThe following table provides a description of E-mail System Settings.

NOTE: Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. It also allows PCS to include the setting in the export file when using the Export Data command (File > Export Data). A check mark inside the Export Setting check box indicates the option is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

Table 2-4. E-mail System Settings

Setting Description

Default email client name Type the name of the email client used by the server or computer that hosts the PCS master database. This setting applies to the optional email notifications feature (Tools > Email). The default setting is MS Exchange Settings.

NOTE: An email client uses a software program such as Microsoft Outlook to send and receive e-mail messages.

Default email client password Type the password of the email account that can send and receive email messages on the server or computer that hosts the PCS master database. This setting applies to the optional email notifications feature (Tools > Email).

Disable all email notifications Enable this setting when you want PCS to stop sending email notifications. This feature applies to the server or computer that hosts the PCS master database and is setup with the optional email notifications feature.

When you want PCS to begin generating email notifications again, disable this setting by clicking the check box to remove the check mark.

Time of day at which automatic e-mail reports are sent

Using 24-hour time format, type the time of day to automatically send E-mail reports on the server or computer that hosts the master database. This setting requires the optional features two-way synchronization feature and E-mail notifications. Examples of 24-hour time format are 01:00 for 1AM and 13:00 for 1PM.

18 Setting Up PCS

Page 27: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Editing System SettingsThe following table provides a description of Editing System Settings.

NOTE: Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. It also allows PCS to include the setting in the export file when using the Export Data command (File > Export Data). A check mark inside the Export Setting check box indicates the option is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

Use alternate Email Notification generator

Use this setting only when directed by Technical Services.

By default PCS uses the email generator that is setup on the server or computer that hosts the master database. Using this setting incorrectly may negatively affect how PCS processes email notifications.

Table 2-5. Editing System Settings

Setting Description

Date carry-forward Enable this option if you want PCS to use the last survey date you enter as the survey date for the next record when working with any inspection grid or form.

Log before and after values of each data change

Enable this setting if you want PCS to track and log changes made to records in grids and forms.

PCS provides a detailed history report with information for each record change. The history report includes before and after values, date and time stamp, and the user name associated with the record change. To generate and view a history report, click View in the button bar of a grid or form and then select Show Record Change History.

Table 2-4. E-mail System Settings (continued)

Setting Description

Setting Up PCS 19

Page 28: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Require user to enter remarks when range or criteria limit is violated (non-ISM)

Enable this option if you want PCS to display a message when a reading entered in a non-ISM Inspections grid or form is out of range or does not meet the criteria limit specified in System Settings. The message indicates the user can either change the reading or type an explanation in the Survey Remarks field of the non-ISM Inspections grid or form.

Show grid tooltips Enable this option if you want a small, yellow window to display with a description of a grid item when you hover the mouse pointer over the item.

Technician name carry-forward method

If you want PCS to automatically enter a person's name in the Technician field of an Inspections grid when entering data, click the down arrow and choose either Last Technician or Security (Logged-in User).

Selecting Last Technician allows PCS to use the name of the last person entered in the Technician field. Selecting Security (Logged-in User) allows PCS to use the name of the person currently logged into PCS.

Time stamp readings Enable this setting if you want PCS to automatically add the current date to a record when entering new readings in a grid or form.

Warn before permanent history record is changed

Enable this option if you want PCS to display a warning message before changing a permanent history record. If you plan to maintain history records, AI recommends that you enable this option.

Warn user when outside of established range values

Enable this option if you want PCS to display a warning message when users enter a reading that is out of range or under criteria. For example, a typical warning message includes the following type of information: The value –2.000 entered for CASING P/S fails to meet the established field range –1.000 AND –0.500.

Table 2-5. Editing System Settings (continued)

Setting Description

20 Setting Up PCS

Page 29: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Warn when below protection criteria

Enable this option if you want PCS to display a warning message when a user enters a reading that is below the protection criteria value. PCS also adds an entry in the Survey Remarks field when a reading uploaded from the Allegro is below the protection criteria value.

Table 2-5. Editing System Settings (continued)

Setting Description

Setting Up PCS 21

Page 30: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Field Computer System SettingsThe following table provides a description of Field Computer System Settings.

NOTE: Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. It also allows PCS to include the setting in the export file when using the Export Data command (File > Export Data). A check mark inside the Export Setting check box indicates the option is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

Table 2-6. Field Computer System Settings

Setting Description

Record potentials using positive polarity

Enable this setting if you want to record readings in PCS with a positive polarity (positive lead connects to electrode and negative lead connects to structure). The default setting for this option is to record readings with a negative polarity (positive lead connects to structure and negative lead connects to electrode).

Require voltage readings to be taken using the voltmeter only

Enable this option if you want the Allegro Field PC to automatically record voltage readings using the built-in voltmeter. Enabling this option prevents manual entry of voltage readings on the Allegro Field PC.

22 Setting Up PCS

Page 31: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

General System SettingsThe following table provides a description of General System Settings.

NOTE: Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. It also allows PCS to include the setting in the export file when using the Export Data command (File > Export Data). A check mark inside the Export Setting check box indicates the option is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

Table 2-7. General System Settings

Setting Description

Activate metric mode Enable this setting if you plan to use the metric system for measurements (meters, millimeters, kilometers, and so on). When this feature is disabled (empty check box), PCS uses Standard Weights and Measures (inches, feet, miles, and so on).

IMPORTANT: Enable metric mode before you begin entering facility data.

Company name Type the name of your company or a different descriptor in this field. The name you enter becomes the top level in the PCS hierarchy. It also displays at the top of the page in all reports.

Include Unit of Measure in all Captions

Enable this setting if you want the description of column headings and fields captions to include the unit of measure inside parentheses. Examples include Structure P/S (Volts) and Bond Current Found (Amps).

NOTE: You can define or change the default unit of measurement in the System-Unit of Measurement column for any field listed in the Field and UDF Customization window (Tools > Data Utilities > Field and UDF Customizations).

Include inactive facilities when generating default routes

Enable this option if you want to include inactive facilities in reports based on PCS default routes. A facility becomes inactive when you remove the check mark in the Facility Active check box in a grid or form.

Setting Up PCS 23

Page 32: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

PCS environment memory size IMPORTANT: Use this setting only when directed by Technical Services. Choosing an incorrect option in the drop-down list can negatively affect your computer’s performance.

Play sounds Enable this option if you want sounds to play when performing certain tasks in PCS.

Surveyed Status Behavior Click the down arrow in the Setting column of Survey Status Behavior and select one of the following options in the drop-down list:

• Any indicator can be populated:at least one inspection field must be populated in the grid. PCS places a check mark in the Surveyed check box to indicate the technician inspected the site and recorded inspection data.

• All indicators must be populated to be surveyed: all fields related to the inspection field must be populated. The Record field associated with the inspection field must be enabled on the Information grid. The setting labeled System-Inspection Surveyed associated with the inspection field must be set as Yes in Field and UDF Customizations.

User location name Type a name for inspection locations along the pipeline, such as Station Number. The default setting is Milepost.

Table 2-7. General System Settings (continued)

Setting Description

24 Setting Up PCS

Page 33: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Hierarchy System SettingsThe following table provides a description of Hierarchy System Settings.

NOTE: Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. It also allows PCS to include the setting in the export file when using the Export Data command (File > Export Data). A check mark inside the Export Setting check box indicates the option is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

Table 2-8. Hierarchy System Settings

Setting Description

Custom input mask (for hierarchy level 1)

If your company uses a certain format style to control how pipelines are named, you can set up PCS with an optional input mask that matches the format style. An input mask serves as a data entry aid when users type a pipeline name (hierarchy level 1) in the ROW code field in the Add New Node window (Select ROWs > New). It also helps to prevent data entry errors.

You can include a dash, slash, space, and alphanumeric characters when defining the pattern of the input mask. Use a pattern (or string expression) such as AAA#XXX to define the input mask, where A represents an alpha character, # represents a space, and X represents any alphanumeric character.

Hide features dealing with parallel lines

Enable this setting if you want to hide features in PCS that allow you to create and display parallel lines in the hierarchy; such as the Select ROWs window and Add New Node dialog box. Distribution companies with no parallel lines typically use this setting.

Setting Up PCS 25

Page 34: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Hierarchy levels in the system Hierarchy levels are the method PCS uses to organize your pipeline system. The hierarchy structure can include up to 5 levels. The default setting is 2 hierarchy levels.

To set up this required setting, click the down arrow in the Setting column and choose 2 levels, 3 levels, 4 levels, or 5 levels. When you finish, type a unique name for each level in the appropriate Level Name text box. Examples of typical Level Names include division, district, region, right-of-way (ROW), segment, and section map.

Level 1 name - Level 5 name In the Setting column of Level 1 name, type the name of hierarchy level 1. Repeat this process for Level 2 name. Hierarchy name as well as ROW Code and ROW Name support up to 100 characters.

If you selected 3 or more hierarchy levels for Hierarchy levels in the system, type a name for each additional hierarchy level (Level 3 name, Level 4 name, and Level 5 name). PCS includes hierarchy names in the Select ROWs window, grids and forms, and reports and graphs.

Table 2-8. Hierarchy System Settings (continued)

Setting Description

26 Setting Up PCS

Page 35: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Replication System SettingsThe following table provides a description of Replication System Settings.

NOTE: Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. It also allows PCS to include the setting in the export file when using the Export Data command (File > Export Data). A check mark inside the Export Setting check box indicates the option is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

Table 2-9. Replication System Settings

Setting Description

Auto-Archive Change Log Records Time

Enter a time for PCS to automatically archive all archivable records for the master database. If this field is empty, PCS automatically begins the archive process at midnight if server mode is running.

Path to server for two-way replication

Type the path to the server or network computer that hosts the PCS master database.

NOTE: For successful two-way replication, replica workstations must be mapped and have read/write access to the server or network computer hosting the master database.

Setting Up PCS 27

Page 36: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Server Shutdown Date

Server Shutdown Frequency in Days

Server Shutdown Time

Use the following settings to setup a recurring schedule or one-time event for automatically shutting down the PCS master database. These settings are typically used when a network server needs to backup the network.

IMPORTANT: The server shutdown date/time schedule only occurs when a frequency value is entered in the field Server Shutdown Frequency in Days.

• Server Shutdown Date:Type a date that identifies when you want the PCS master database to shut down. Type the date using the MM/DD/YYYY format to indicate the month, day, and year.

• Server Shutdown Frequency in Days:Type the number of days between automatic shutdowns of the PCS master database. For example, the default setting 7 indicates the master database automatically shuts down every seven (7) days.

• Server Shutdown Time:Using 24-hour time format, type the time of day you want the PCS master database to automatically shut down.

Synchronization timeout (seconds) Type a time-out period in seconds if you want a time-out to occur when the PCS master database is unable to synchronize. When the time-out period expires, the PCS master database stops synchronization.

Table 2-9. Replication System Settings (continued)

Setting Description

28 Setting Up PCS

Page 37: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Report System SettingsThe following table provides a description of Report System Settings.

NOTE: Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. It also allows PCS to include the setting in the export file when using the Export Data command (File > Export Data). A check mark inside the Export Setting check box indicates the option is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

Table 2-10. Reports System Settings

Setting Description

Signature line caption Type a title to include as a caption below the signature line of a Columnar or Form report. The default title is Surveyor.

NOTE: The Include signature line option must also be enabled in Print Options of the Layout tab for a Columnar or Form report.

Setting Up PCS 29

Page 38: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Security System SettingsThe following table provides a description of Security System Settings.

NOTE: Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. It also allows PCS to include the setting in the export file when using the Export Data command (File > Export Data). A check mark inside the Export Setting check box indicates the option is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

Table 2-11. Security System Settings

Setting Description

Non-supervisor password expiration time in days

Use the drop-down list to choose an interval for logon passwords to expire in PCS for non-supervisor users. To use this feature, Enable security in System Settings must be enabled.

You can set passwords to expire after a number of days (7–70 days), or you can specify that passwords never expire. A user can however change their password at any time. When a password expires and a user attempts to log into PCS, a message displays notifying the user to change the expired password. The user can create a new password using the PCS login screen.

Use hierarchical security IMPORTANT: PCS systems using two-way synchronization should not use hierarchical security to control hierarchy views on client replica computers. To control hierarchy views, use a replica definition instead of hierarchical security.

Enable this setting if you plan to setup non-supervisor users with hierarchy rights. (Tools > Security > ROW Hierarchy Security).

Hierarchical security allows you to assign users access rights to certain hierarchy folders in the Select ROWs window. When a user does not have access rights to a hierarchy folder, PCS does not display the folder in the Select ROWs window.

30 Setting Up PCS

Page 39: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Creating a Record for a New Pipeline SegmentWhen creating a record for a new pipeline segment, you assign the pipeline segment a place in the hierarchy; enter the ROW name and code; and then choose a default location format for facilities linked to the pipeline segment. If the pipeline segment includes a parallel pipeline, you also enter the pipeline code and pipeline name of the parallel pipeline.

A parallel pipeline typically shares the same ROW as a pipeline segment, as well as rectifiers and most test points. A parallel pipeline in PCS shares the same ROW Name and ROW Code as the pipeline segment. Creating a parallel pipeline in PCS makes it easier to perform a survey on two pipelines that share a ROW. It allows you to move back and forth between two pipelines instead of surveying one pipeline completely and then the other.

After creating a record for the new pipeline segment and choosing a default location format, you can then use PCS to add and manage different types of data related to the pipeline segment, such as inspection readings and maintenance information.

All examples use ACME Oil as the name of the pipeline company. The PCS hierarchy for ACME Oil includes the following structure: ROW (level 1 name for pipeline segments), Category (level 2 name for facility types such as rectifiers, tanks, bonds, and test points), Division (level 3 name), and Region (level 4 name).

NOTE: Hierarchy name as well as ROW Code and ROW Name support up to 100 characters.

To create a record for a new pipeline segment1 Click File > Select ROWs > New to display the Add New Node window

(Figure 2-4).

Figure 2-4. Add New Node

Setting Up PCS 31

Page 40: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

2 Assign the pipeline segment a place in the hierarchy by typing a name for the folder in the field of the appropriate hierarchy level. If hierarchy folders already exist, click the open/close button and select a hierarchy folder from the list of options (Figure 2-5). Repeat this step for each new hierarchy folder as needed.

Figure 2-5. Add New Note - Hierarchy Folders

3 Type a unique code number for the new pipeline segment in the ROW Code field.

The ROW Code can include alphanumeric characters in a format based on how your company identifies pipeline segments.

4 Type a name for the new pipeline segment in the ROW Name field.

5 If the pipeline segment includes a parallel pipeline, complete the following steps:

a Type a code for the parallel pipeline in the Pipeline Code field.

b Type the name of the parallel pipeline in the Pipeline Name field.

6 Click Apply to add the new pipeline segment and then click OK when the following message displays.

Your new node was created successfully.

7 Click Close to exit the Add New Node window.

The new pipeline segment is now available for selection in the Select ROWs window. The pipeline segment must be selected before PCS allows you to add related information, such as choosing a default location format or adding inspection readings and maintenance information in grids and forms.

32 Setting Up PCS

Page 41: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

8 Select the new pipeline segment in the Select ROWs window by double-clicking the ROW code or name. A check mark beside the pipeline segment indicates a selection (Figure 2-6). When you finish, click Close to exit the Select ROWs window.

Figure 2-6. Selecting a Pipeline Segment in Select ROWs

9 Complete the following steps to select a Default Location Format for the new pipeline segment:

a Click Data Entry > Edit ROW Detail (Figure 2-7, page 34).

b Click the Default Location Format field and select an option from the drop-down list. See the next table for a description of default location formats available for selection (Table 2-12, page 34).

Setting Up PCS 33

Page 42: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Figure 2-7. Edit ROW Detail

Table 2-12. Description of Default Location Formats

Location Format Format Example Description

Milepost (3 Decimals) 12345.567

-or-

1234.567AB

Measurements are in miles. This format can include two alpha characters at the end of the milepost and can also be graphed.

Milepost (4 Decimals) 123.5678

-or-

1234.5678A

Measurements are in miles. This format can include one alpha character at the end of the milepost and can also be graphed.

Reading Number 12345678AB Numeric format with two alpha characters at the end. This format is typically used for stations.

This format cannot be graphed and the CP Compliance Report does not calculate total feet, total miles, or miles below criteria.

34 Setting Up PCS

Page 43: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Location ID 1234567891

-or-

ABCDEFGHIJ

NOTE: Location ID cannot be changed once it is setup.

Use Location ID when footages are not applicable. This format is typically used in distribution systems. Other features include those in the following list:

• Accepts alphanumeric characters, but cannot be graphed.

• CP Compliance Report does not calculate total feet, total miles, or miles below criteria when using this format.

Station Number 12345+67AB Measurements are in feet. This format can be graphed and also supports two alpha characters at the end.

Miles+100 Feet 12345+12

-or-

12345+12AB

Format uses miles plus two digits to the right to indicate hundreds of feet. For example, 110+12 indicates 110 miles and 1,200 feet. Do not enter values greater than 53 feet; doing so indicates another mile.

Other characteristics include:

• Format can be graphed.

• Two alpha characters can be used after the first 3 numbers.

• CP Compliance Report does not calculate total feet, total miles, or miles below criteria.

Miles/Station Number 123A 45+67

-or-

123A 12+34

Format uses Miles<space>Station Number with Milepost (3 Decimals) in graphs.

Table 2-12. Description of Default Location Formats (continued)

Location Format Format Example Description

Setting Up PCS 35

Page 44: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Custom ModulesA custom module is a user defined module. When you need to manage compliance data for facility types not included in PCS, use Custom Module Management (CMM) to add a custom module with up to six (6) custom facility types. For example, adding a custom module with custom facility types allows you to manage compliance data for major components associated with a cathodic protection electrical system or a gas odorization system.

Topics in this section include those in the following list:

• About Custom Modules

• Adding a Custom Module with Custom Facility Types (page 37)

• Deleting a Custom Module or Custom Facility Type (page 40)

About Custom ModulesA custom module provides the same features and functions as PCS installed modules. A PCS installed module is a module installed during the PCS software installation, such as CPDM, ISM, ICM, ACM, VM, and so on. A custom module is available for use throughout PCS. For example, when you add a custom module, it is available for use in the Modules, Data Entry, and Reports/Graphs menus, Field and UDF Customizations, Bridge, and Email Notification.

Likewise, the following features provided with PCS installed modules are also provided with a custom module: Information, Inspection, and Maintenance data entry grids; layout, sorting, and filter themes; reports and graphs; and optional routes, schedules, and scheduling types for user defined facility types.

The process for adding a custom module includes the following tasks (Figure 2-8, page 37):

• Add a custom module with up to six (6) custom facility types (Modules > Custom Module Management).

• Add one or more user defined fields (UDFs) as needed to be used throughout the system, such as data entry grids, reports, and graphs (Tools > Data Utilities > Field and UDF Customizations).

• Set up data entry grids, reports and graphs, scheduling, and routes as needed.

36 Setting Up PCS

Page 45: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Figure 2-8. Workflow for Adding a Custom Module

Adding a Custom Module with Custom Facility TypesInformation in this section explains how to add a custom module with custom facility types. Each custom module supports a maximum of six (6) custom facility types.

To add a custom module, follow these steps:

1 Click Modules > Custom Module Management to open the Custom Module Management window (Figure 2-9).

Figure 2-9. Custom Module Management

Set properties in CMM (Modules > Custom Module Management)

Set Options for Schedules, Routes, and Range Data

Add Custom Module(s)

Add Custom Facility Type(s)

1 Add Custom Module

Set properties as needed for the following system features:

Add User Defined Fields(Tools > Data Utilities > Field and UDF Customizations)

Set Up Data Entry Grids with Layout, Sorting, and Filter Themes

(Data Entry > Edit <module> Data)

Set Up Reports/Graphs with Layout, Sorting, and Filter Themes

(Reports/Graphs)

Set Up Scheduling and/or Routes

(Data Entry > Edit Schedule Settings & Define Schedules; Define Routes)

2 Set Up System Features

Setting Up PCS 37

Page 46: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

2 Click the add button in the top Modules pane to open the New Module dialog box (Figure 2-10).

3 Type a module name and acronym in the Module Name and Acronym fields respectively.

4 Click the Color button to open a color palette. Click a color swatch to associate a color with the custom module. Then click OK to close the color palette.

5 To add the first custom facility type, follow these steps:

a Type a name for the custom facility type in the Name, Long Name, and Short Name fields.

The Name fields supports up to 17 characters; the Long Name field up to 40 characters; and the Short Name field up to 4 characters. Each of these fields also support spaces and special characters such as a dash (–) or pound sign (#).

b If you want the facility type available for selection when setting up a route, or schedule, click the respective check boxes labeled Routable and/or Schedulable.

c If the custom facility type will use range mileposts similar to range data in the PIM and PLSM modules, select the option Range Data.

Enabling Range Data allows PCS to include fields for starting and ending milepost locations when working in grids and reports. This allows you to enter data for a range of facilities (data points) located in specific sections of a pipeline.

Figure 2-10. New Module

38 Setting Up PCS

Page 47: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

6 Click OK to close the dialog box and create the custom module and first custom facility type.

7 To add another custom facility type to the custom module, follow these steps:

a Verify the custom module is selected in the top Modules pane.

b Click the add button in the bottom Facility Types pane.

c Type a name for the custom facility type in the Name, Long Name, and Short Name fields.

d If you want the facility type available for selection when setting up a route, or schedule, click the respective check boxes labeled Routable and/or Schedulable.

e If the custom facility type will use range mileposts similar to range data in the PIM and PLSM modules, select the option Range Data.

f Click OK to add the custom facility type and close the dialog box.

8 Repeat step 7 as needed to add additional custom facility types.

NOTE: To change the order of custom facility types listed in the bottom Facility Types pane, select a custom facility type and then click the up or down arrow buttons to move the item up or down.

9 Click Close to close the Custom Module Management window.

Continue to set up PCS and the custom module using features identified in the remaining sections, such as adding user defined fields for use with the custom module; setting up data entry grids; setting properties for scheduling, routes, and reports/graphs.

Setting Up PCS 39

Page 48: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Deleting a Custom Module or Custom Facility TypeInformation in this section explains how to delete a custom module from PCS (step 1) or a custom facility type previously added to a custom module (step 2).

Complete one or both of the following steps as needed:

1 To delete a custom module:

a If the Custom Module Management window is not open, click Module > Custom Module Management (Figure 2-9, page 37).

b Select the custom module you want to delete in the top Modules pane. Then click the delete button in the top pane.

c When a warning message displays, click Yes (Figure 2-11).

d Click Yes again when the Delete message opens. Then click Close to close the Custom Module Management window.

Figure 2-11. Warning Message

2 To delete a custom facility type:

a If the Custom Module Management window is not open, click Module > Custom Module Management (Figure 2-9, page 37).

b Select the custom module in the top Modules pane that includes the custom facility type you want to delete.

c Select the custom facility type you want to delete in the bottom Facility Types pane. Then click the delete button in the bottom pane.

40 Setting Up PCS

Page 49: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

d When a warning message displays, click Yes (Figure 2-12).

e Click Yes again when the Delete message opens, and then OK to complete the delete process.

Figure 2-12. Warning Message

Custom Facility Types in PCS Installed ModulesA PCS installed module is a module included in the PCS software installation such as CPDM, ISM, VM, ICM, and so on. A custom facility type is a user defined facility type. When you need to maintain data for a facility type not included with a PCS installed module, add a custom facility type using Custom Module Management (CMM).

For example, adding a custom facility type labeled PIG in the ICM module allows you to maintain data related to pipeline pigging using the Information, Inspections, and Maintenance data grids in the ICM module. Custom facility types are supported throughout PCS in reports, schedules, routes, Bridge, and Email Notifications.

NOTE: PIG is an acronym for pipeline inspection gauge.

Topics in this section include those in the following list:

• Adding a Custom Facility Type in a PCS Installed Module

• Deleting a Custom Facility Type in a PCS Installed Module (page 44)

Setting Up PCS 41

Page 50: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Adding a Custom Facility Type in a PCS Installed ModuleTo add a custom facility type in a PCS installed module, follow these steps:

1 Click Module > Custom Module Management to open the Custom Module Management window (Figure 2-13).

Figure 2-13. Custom Module Management

2 In the top Modules pane, select the PCS installed module you want to add a user defined facility type. In the following example the ICM module is selected in the top Modules pane. A list of related facility types installed with the module display in the bottom Facility Types pane (Figure 2-14).

Figure 2-14. Custom Module Management

42 Setting Up PCS

Page 51: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

3 Click the add button in the bottom Facility Types pane to open the New Facility Type dialog box (Figure 2-15).

The name and acronym of the selected PCS installed module display in the fields Module Name and Acronym respectively. For example, the name of the selected module in the following figure is Internal Corrosion Manager (Figure 2-15).

Figure 2-15. New Facility Type

4 Type the name, long name, and short name of the custom facility type in the Name, Long Name, and Short Name fields respectively.

The Name field supports up to 18 characters, the Long Name field up to 40 characters, and the Short Name field up to 4 characters. These include spaces, numbers, and special characters such as a hyphen (–) and pound sign (#).

5 If you want the custom facility type available for selection when setting up a route or schedule, click the respective check boxes labeled Routable and/or Schedulable.

6 If the custom facility type will use range mileposts similar to range data in the PIM and PLSM modules, select the option Range Data.

Enabling Range Data allows PCS to include fields for starting and ending milepost locations when working in data grids and reports. This allows you to enter data for a range of facilities (data points) located in specific sections of a pipeline.

7 Click OK to add the custom facility type.

Continue to set up PCS and the custom facility type using features identified in the remaining sections, such as setting up data entry grids; setting properties for scheduling, routes, and reports/graphs.

Setting Up PCS 43

Page 52: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Deleting a Custom Facility Type in a PCS Installed ModuleTo delete a custom facility type previously added in a PCS installed module, follow these steps:

1 If the Custom Module Management window is not open, click Module > Custom Module Management (Figure 2-9, page 37).

2 Select the PCS installed module in the top Modules pane that includes the custom facility type you want to delete.

3 Select the custom facility type you want to delete in the bottom Facility Types pane. Then click the delete button in the bottom pane.

4 When a warning message displays, click Yes (Figure 2-16).

5 Click Yes again when the Delete message opens, and then OK to complete the delete process.

Figure 2-16. Warning Message

Field and UDF CustomizationsUse Field and UDF Customizations to set field properties for any field in PCS including user-defined fields. Topics in this section explain how to use Field and UDF Customizations when working with the following features in PCS:

• User-Defined Fields (page 45)

• Enabled Expression (page 48)

• Range Checking (page 50)

• Setting Properties for Inherited Values (page 52)

• Field Captions (page 57)

44 Setting Up PCS

Page 53: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

User-Defined FieldsA user-defined field (UDF) is a field you create when PCS does not provide a field for data entry. When using two-way synchronization, UDFs are created on the server or computer that hosts the master database. UDFs cannot be created on a client replica computer.

Topics in this section include those in the following list:

• To create a UDF

• To add a UDF to a grid (page 47)

To create a UDF1 Click Tools > Data Utilities > Field and UDF Customizations to open the Field

and UDF Customizations window (Figure 2-17 on page 45).

2 Click the open icon (+) of the folder that contains the grid you want to create a UDF. Click to select the grid. For example, open the Common to All Facilities folder and select the Maintenance grid.

NOTE: The column next to the Caption column identifies the type of UDF, such as: U = UDF and C = calculated UDF. The Data Type column identifies the UDF data type, such as: C = character, N = numeric, D = date, L = logical, and T = date and time (Figure 2-17, page 45).

Figure 2-17. Field and UDF Customizations

Setting Up PCS 45

Page 54: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

3 Click New to display the Add New UDF window (Figure 2-18).

4 Type a name for the UDF in the Caption field.

Figure 2-18. Add New UDF

5 Review information in the next table and then setup one or more UDFs as required (Table 2-13). When you finish, continue with the next procedure to add the UDF to a grid.

Table 2-13. Add New UDF Field Descriptions

Field Name Description

Character Supports character and numeric data; mixed data such as a number, character, or dash; and when creating a validation table for a UDF.

Numeric Supports numeric values in the following format 999.999 and –99.999.

Date Applies a date format to entered values using forward slashes, such as 12/34/5678.

Logical Supports a yes/no selection in the form of a check box in the grid to enable or disable an option.

Memo Supports more than 255 characters. Also supports carriage returns.

Date Time Applies a date/time format to entered data, such as 12/34/5678 12:34:56.

Width and Decimals Applies a character or numeric width and/or decimal format.

Normal UDF Use this option with any Data Type selection.

46 Setting Up PCS

Page 55: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

To add a UDF to a grid1 Open the grid. For example, click Data Entry > Edit CP Data by Facility.

2 Click View > Data View > Layout tab (Figure 2-19).

3 Double-click the new UDF in the left pane to move it to the right pane.

4 If you want to move the new UDF to a different position in the list, and subsequently a different position in the grid, click and drag the field button to a new position. The cursor changes to an up/down arrow indicating the selection can be moved up or down.

Figure 2-19. Data View Layout

Calculated UDF Select this option to display the UDF Calculation Editor to set up a UDF expression. See the section entitled Enabled Expression for information about working with PCS expressions.

Milepost UDF Select this option and then choose a format in the Milepost Format drop-down list.

Validated UDF Supports a drop-down selection list. Also requires setting up a validation table for the validated UDF (Tools > Data Utilities > Validation Tables).

Table 2-13. Add New UDF Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

Setting Up PCS 47

Page 56: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Enabled ExpressionAn Enabled Expression determines when a data field is enabled for data entry in a grid. The expression editor allows you to define an expression. An expression is a logical statement with specific conditions that must be met before PCS enables the data field for data entry. Logical statements are either true or false based on the conditions defined in the expression.

The example below shows a simple expression for a user-defined field labeled Shorted P/S. If Casing P/S is below protection criteria (less than or more negative than –0.8495), PCS enables Shorted P/S for data entry in the grid. The field is not enabled for data entry when Casing P/S meets protection criteria.

EXAMPLE: [Casing P/S]<–0.8495

You can create more complex expressions, including those that contain Microsoft Visual FoxPro commands. The following list identifies other requirements for using Enabled Expressions:

• If you plan to work with a user-defined field (UDF), create the UDF first in Field and UDF Customizations and then define an Enabled Expression for the UDF.

• The Record field for the data field must be added and enabled in the Information grid. Using the previous example, the Record Shorted P/S field must be added and enabled on the Information grid.

• The Shorted P/S field must be added in the Inspections grid.

Continue with the following topic for more information To create an enabled expression (page 49).

48 Setting Up PCS

Page 57: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

To create an enabled expression 1 Click Tools > Data Utilities > Field and UDF Customizations (Figure 2-20).

2 Click the open icon (+) for a PCS module that contains the grid and data field you want to create an Enabled Expression. For example, click CPDM > Test Points > Test Point Inspections.

3 Select a data field in the grid that you want to create an Enabled Expression. For example, Shorted P/S in the CPDM Test Point Inspections grid is selected in the next figure (Figure 2-20).

4 Display the column labeled System-Enabled Expression.

Figure 2-20. Enabled Expression Data Field

Setting Up PCS 49

Page 58: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

5 Click Enabled Expression to display the expression editor.

The next figure shows the expression editor with a definition for Shorted P/S. When Casing P/S is less than –0.8495, PCS enables Shorted P/S in the grid for data entry (Figure 2-21).

Figure 2-21. Expression Editor

Range CheckingUse range checking to specify an acceptable range of values for data entry in inspection fields. For example, when a data entry field is setup with range checking using the values 0-10, values entered during data entry must also be in that range.

To set up a data field with range checking1 Click Tools > Data Utilities > Field and UDF Customizations (Figure 2-22,

page 51).

2 Click the open icon (+) for the folder that contains the grid and data field you want to setup for range checking. For example, open the CPDM folder and select Test Point Inspections.

3 Click the open icon (+) for a PCS module that contains the grid and data field you want to setup for range checking. For example, click CPDM > Test Points > Test Point Inspections.

4 Select the field you want to setup for range checking. For example, select Structure P/S in the CPDM Test Point Inspections grid is selected in the next figure (Figure 2-22).

50 Setting Up PCS

Page 59: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

5 Display the System Default Maximum and System Default Minimum fields.

6 Type a maximum value for range checking in the System Default Maximum field.

7 Type a minimum value for range checking in the System Default Minimum field.

8 Click Close to save changes and close the window.

Figure 2-22. Range Checking

Setting Up PCS 51

Page 60: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Setting Properties for Inherited ValuesInherited values is a feature that simplifies data input when entering data in a PCS data entry grid. It allows a user to select an item in a drop-down list for one field, and then have PCS automatically populate another field with an inherited value. Each item available for selection in the drop-down list maps to a specific inherited value as defined during setup. Property settings for inheritance include mapping of two fields in Field and UDF Customizations and then setting inheritance properties for these fields in Validation Tables.

The following procedure uses two fields in the ICM module as an example. One is a Normal user-defined field labeled My Coupon Type. The other is a system field labeled Coupon Size. The procedure explains how to map and set inheritance properties for these two fields. When completed, a user is then able to input data for these fields in the Coupons Inspection data entry grid using a drop-down list and inherited values.

Complete the following steps:

1 Open the Field and UDF Customizations window. Click Tools > Data Utilities > Field and UDF Customizations.

2 In the navigation tree, click the open icon (+) for Facility Surveys > ICM > Coupons. Then click Coupon Inspections (Figure 2-23).

Figure 2-23. Coupon Inspections

52 Setting Up PCS

Page 61: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

3 Click New to open the Add New UDF dialog box (Figure 2-24).

4 Add a new user-defined field labeled My Coupon Type using the following property settings:

a Type My Coupon Type in the Caption field.

b Click the down arrow in the Data Type field and select Character in the selection list.

c Use the up/down arrows in the Width field to identify how many characters are allowed when entering data in the user-defined field My Coupon Type.

d Click OK and then click Yes when the New UDF message displays.

PCS adds the new user-defined field in the Coupon Inspections grid of Field and UDF Customizations ready for property settings.

NOTE: For more information about working with user-defined fields, see User-Defined Fields (page 45).

Figure 2-24. Add New UDF

Setting Up PCS 53

Page 62: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

5 To make it easier working in the grid of Field and UDF Customizations, set the grid to only display the Inheritance property setting in the following manner:

a Click View to open the Column Selections dialog box (Figure 2-25).

b Click None and then navigate to the Inheritance property. Click the Inheritance check box to place a check mark inside the check box.

c Click the close button to close the dialog box and return to the Field and UDF Customizations grid.

Figure 2-25. Column Selections

54 Setting Up PCS

Page 63: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

6 To map the user-defined field My Coupon Type to the system field labeled Coupon Size, follow these steps:

a Click the Edit Inheritance field associated with the field My Coupon Type (Figure 2-26).

Figure 2-26. Edit Inheritance

b When the Edit Inheritance dialog box opens, click the option Inheritance Depends On. Then click the down arrow in the adjacent field and select Coupon Size in the selection list (Figure 2-27).

c Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the grid. Then click Close to close the Field and UDF Customizations window.

Figure 2-27. Edit Inheritance

7 Open the Validation Tables window. Click Tools > Data Utilities > Validation Tables (Figure 2-28, page 56).

Setting Up PCS 55

Page 64: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

8 Set up a validation table (picklist) with inherited values for the fields My Coupon Type and Coupon Size in the following manner.

Setting the following properties will allow a user to select a coupon size from a picklist (validation table) and then based on inherited values, have PCS automatically populate the coupon type when working in the data entry grid.

a In the navigation tree, click the open icon (+) for Facility Surveys > ICM > Coupons > Coupon Inspections. Then click Coupon Size (Figure 2-28).

b Click New to add a row of empty records. Type a name or other identifier representing the picklist selection in the Select field. For example, type A to represent Coupon Size A.

c Type a description for the picklist selection in the Description field. For example, type the size of coupon A in the field, such as 2-7/8” x 7/8” x 1/8”.

d Type a value in the Sort Order field to assign a sequence order to the picklist selection. For example, if you want the picklist selection to appear first in the list of all possible selections, type 1 in the Sort Order field.

e Map an inherited value to the picklist selection. Type a description in the Inheritance field to associate the field with the picklist selection. For example, type the name of a coupon type in the Inheritance field to associate it with the coupon size, such as Strip #15.

Figure 2-28. Validation Tables

56 Setting Up PCS

Page 65: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

f Click Save and then repeat steps 8 "b" through "e" as needed to add additional picklist selections with associated inherited values.

g Click Close to close the Validation Tables window.

9 The fields My Coupon Type and Coupon Size are now ready for use in the Coupon Inspections data entry grid. If you need to add these fields in the data entry grid, review the information in the section Set Up a Grid or Form for Data Entry (page 108).

Field CaptionsThe following procedure explains how to rename a field caption. The instructions apply to all data fields and grids, including default PCS system fields.

To change the name of a field caption1 Click Tools > Data Utilities > Field and UDF Customizations (Figure 2-29).

2 Click the open icon (+) of the folder that contains the grid with the data field you want to rename. For example, click CPDM > Test Points > Test Point Inspections.

3 Type a name in the Caption field for a field you want to rename.

For example, the CPDM field Structure P/S is renamed Struct. Pipe-to-Soil in the next figure (Figure 2-29).

4 Click Close to save changes and close the window.

Figure 2-29. Rename Field Caption

Setting Up PCS 57

Page 66: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Validation TablesValidation tables are used to limit data input to predefined choices for selection. By limiting a user’s selection to certain choices, PCS is able to validate accuracy and spelling of entered data.

To create a validation table1 Click Tools > Data Utilities > Validation Tables (Figure 2-30).

Figure 2-30. Validation Tables

2 Click the open icon (+) to open a folder that contains the grid and field you want to add a validation table. For example, click the open icon for Common To All Facilities as shown in the next example (Figure 2-31, page 59).

3 Select a grid to view a list of fields available for adding a validation table. For example, select Maintenance.

58 Setting Up PCS

Page 67: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Figure 2-31. Add Validation Table

4 Click New to add a record in the Validation pane.

5 Provide the following information for the new record:

a Type a reference or code number in the Select field that identifies the validation choice.

b Type the name of the validation choice in the Description field.

c Type a number in the Order field to assign a menu sequence order. For example, a validation choice appears first in the list when you assign 1, second in the list when using 2, and so on.

d Click Save.

6 Repeat step 5 for each additional validation choice you want to enter.

Setting Up PCS 59

Page 68: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

SecuritySecurity is an optional feature setup by the PCS administrator. PCS security grants or denies user access to menus, commands, and grid functions. Restricting user access to certain features can help prevent accidental loss of permanent information, such as accidentally deleting facilities or renaming pipeline segments.

Topics in this section include those in the following list:

• System and Hierarchical Security

• Hierarchical Security (page 70)

System and Hierarchical SecurityThe procedures in this section explain how to enable system and hierarchical security. Security is disabled by default and must be enabled in System Settings after installing PCS.

IMPORTANT: PCS systems using two-way synchronization should not use hierarchical security to control hierarchy views on client replica computers. Use a replica definition to control hierarchy views instead of hierarchical security.

Topics in this section include those in the following list:

• To enable system security and hierarchical security (page 61)

• To create a new security group (page 62)

• To add a user to a security group (page 64)

• To assign user access privileges (page 65)

• To assign grid rights (page 67)

• To assign data field rights (page 68)

• To assign system settings rights (page 69)

60 Setting Up PCS

Page 69: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

To enable system security and hierarchical security1 Click Tools > System Settings > Security tab (Figure 2-32).

Figure 2-32. Security in System Settings

2 Click the check box in the Setting column for the Enable security field to enable system security.

3 If the Login message displays, complete the following steps:

a Click OK to close the message.

b If you want to change the default password, complete the following steps. If not, continue with step "c".

1) Click Change Password.

2) Type a new password in the New Password field.

3) Enter the new password again in the Confirm Password field and then click OK.

c Type the default password in the Password field and then click OK.

4 To enable hierarchy security, click the check box in the Setting column for the field Use hierarchical security. When the login dialog box appears, type your administrator password in the Password field and then click OK.

Setting Up PCS 61

Page 70: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

5 If you want to set an expiration date for user passwords, click the arrow in the Setting column for the field Non-supervisor password expiration time in days. Select an option from the drop-down list to set an expiration date (in days) for user passwords.

6 In the Export Setting column, click the check box for each setting you want to include in a PCS export file (File > Export Data). If you are using two-way synchronization, settings also export during replication.

7 Click Close to save settings and close the window.

To create a new security groupPCS grants or denies user access to menus and functions based on settings in Security Setup. After creating a group, add one or more users to the group and then assign access privileges to the group as required.

Complete the following steps to create a new security group:

1 Click Tools > Security > Security Setup > Groups tab (Figure 2-33).

Figure 2-33. Security Group

2 Click New and then OK when the Required Entries message displays.

3 Type a name for the new group in the Group Name field and a description in the Group Description field Figure 2-34.

62 Setting Up PCS

Page 71: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

4 If you want users to create and modify public themes, click the Create/Modify Public Themes check box.

5 If you want users to be able to add new facilities on the Allegro Field PC, click the Create Facilities on Allegro check box.

6 Repeat steps "3" through "5" for each new group you want to create. When you finish, continue with the next section to add users to the security group.

Figure 2-34. Security Group Setup

Setting Up PCS 63

Page 72: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

To add a user to a security group1 Click Tools > Security > Security Setup > Groups tab (Figure 2-35).

2 Click to select a security group in the Group Name field.

Figure 2-35. Select Security Group

3 Click Users tab > New. Type the user’s PCS login name in the Login Name field and their password in the Password field (Figure 2-36).

Figure 2-36. Add User to Security Group

64 Setting Up PCS

Page 73: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

4 Click the Group Assignment field and assign the user to a security group.

5 Type additional information about the user in the Comments field.

6 Type the user’s last name, first name, and middle initial (optional) in the Last Name, First Name, and Middle Initial fields respectively.

7 Repeat steps "6" and "7" to add additional users to the security group as needed.

8 Continue with the next section to assign user access privileges.

To assign user access privilegesThe following procedure explains how to assign users access privileges to menus, functions, and data entry grids.

Complete the following steps:

1 Click Tools > Security > Security Setup > Menu, Form and Function Rights tab (Figure 2-37).

2 Click the down arrow in the Module Filter field and select a PCS module. Or select All Modules if you want settings to apply to all PCS modules.

Figure 2-37. User Access Privileges

Setting Up PCS 65

Page 74: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

3 Select how many levels of commands and functions to display by clicking the up/down arrows in the Level Filter field and selecting 1, 2, 3, or 4. Selecting 4 displays all menus, commands, and functions (Figure 2-38).

4 To prevent access to a menu, form, or function, click the check box to remove the check mark. By default PCS grants access to all menus, forms, and functions; this is indicated with a check mark inside a check box.

5 Continue with the next section to assign grid rights.

Figure 2-38. Security Level Filter

66 Setting Up PCS

Page 75: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

To assign grid rights1 Click Tools > Security > Security Setup > Grid Rights tab (Figure 2-39).

Figure 2-39. Grid Rights in Security Setup

2 Click the down arrow in the Module Filter field and select a PCS module. Or select All Modules if you want settings to apply to all PCS modules.

3 To restrict access to a grid or function, click a check box to remove the check mark. By default PCS grants access to all grids and functions; this is indicated with a check mark inside a check box (Figure 2-39).

4 If you want to prevent users from editing data older than a certain number of days, click the up/down arrows in the Grid Change Lookback Limit field and select the number of days.

Grid Change Lookback Limit is set to zero by default, which disables the feature. Selecting a value, such as 90 days, allows PCS to prevent users from editing data that is older than 90 days.

Setting Up PCS 67

Page 76: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

To assign data field rights1 Click Tools > Security > Security Setup > Field Rights tab (Figure 2-40).

2 Click the open icon (+) to open a folder that contains the grid and fields you want to setup. For example, click CPDM > Test Points > Test Point Inspections.

3 By default PCS grants access to all editing functions. This is indicated with a check mark inside each check box. To prevent access, click the check box in the Edit column to remove the check mark.

As an example, to prevent a user from editing casing pipe-to-soil (P/S) inspection readings in the CPDM Test Point Inspections grid, the Edit function has been disabled for the Casing P/S field in the next figure (Figure 2-40).

Figure 2-40. Field Rights in Security Setup

68 Setting Up PCS

Page 77: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

To assign system settings rights1 Click Tools > Security > Security Setup > System Settings Rights tab

(Figure 2-41).

2 By default PCS grants access to all System Settings. This is indicated with a check mark inside each check box. To prevent access, click the check box in the Edit column to remove the check mark.

As an example, to prevent a user from editing the Bullhorn FTP site folder, click the check box labeled Bullhorn FTP site folder in the Edit column to remove the check mark as shown in the next figure (Figure 2-41).

Figure 2-41. System Settings Rights in Security Setup

Setting Up PCS 69

Page 78: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Hierarchical SecurityInformation in this section explains how to set up hierarchical security for granting user access to hierarchy folders and pipeline segments in the Select ROWs window. If a user does not have security rights to a hierarchy folder, PCS does not display the hierarchy folder and related pipeline segments; subsequently the hierarchy folder and pipeline segments are unavailable for selection by the user.

IMPORTANT: PCS systems using two-way synchronization should not use hierarchical security to control hierarchy views on client replica computers. Use a replica definition to control hierarchy views instead of hierarchical security.

To set up hierarchical security1 Verify Use hierarchical security is enabled in System Settings (Tools > System

Settings > Security).

2 Click Tools > Security > ROW Hierarchy Security (Figure 2-42, page 71).

NOTE: The menu command ROW Hierarchy Security may be labeled differently on your computer based on the description of Hierarchy Level 1 in System Settings. For example, when Hierarchy Level 1 is labeled Pipeline Segment, the menu command Pipeline Segment Hierarchy Security displays.

3 Click Selected User and select a user name from the drop-down list (Figure 2-42, page 71).

4 Click the open icon (+) to display a list of pipeline segments in a hierarchy folder.

70 Setting Up PCS

Page 79: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Figure 2-42. ROW Hierarchy Security

5 To grant access to a pipeline segment, click the check box adjacent to the name of the pipeline segment to place a check mark inside the check box. To deny access, remove the check mark by clicking the check box again.

6 Repeat steps "4" and "5" for each additional pipeline segment you want to grant or deny the user access. When you finish, click Close to save settings and close the window.

Setting Up PCS 71

Page 80: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Pipeline SeriesUse Pipeline Series to adjust or shift milepost numbers for a pipeline when adding a pipeline extension, re-routing a pipeline, or designating two pipelines as parallel lines. Pipeline Series allows you to adjust milepost numbers in PCS rather than renumbering milepost numbers in the field. The calculated milepost number resulting from a Pipeline Series is referred to as Relative Milepost.

For more information, continue with the next section entitled To create and apply a pipeline series.

To create and apply a pipeline seriesEach pipeline can have more than one Pipeline Series. A Pipeline Series consists of a unique Series Number, Start Milepost (starting milepost number), and an End Milepost (ending milepost number). PCS uses each of these to calculate the Relative Milepost number for the entire length of the pipeline.

NOTE: When creating a unique Series Number for a Pipeline Series, use numbers in increments of 10, 100, or 1000. This allows you to add other Series Numbers later using numbers that are between existing Series Numbers.

The following procedure explains how to create a Pipeline Series and apply it to existing milepost numbers in a grid. The example adds a 2,000 foot pipeline extension using Series Number 100 for the extension and Series Number 200 for the entire length of the pipeline.

Complete the following steps:

1 Select the pipeline(s) you want to work with in the Select ROWs window and then click Close to close the window (Figure 2-43, page 73).

72 Setting Up PCS

Page 81: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Figure 2-43. Select ROWs

2 Click Data Entry > Pipeline Series > New to insert a new record (Figure 2-44).

3 Enter the following information for the new Pipeline Series:

a Type a unique number in the Series Number field. For example, type 100 if this is the first pipeline series, 200 for the second, and so on.

b Type starting and ending milepost numbers in the Start Milepost and End Milepost fields.

4 Repeat steps "2" and "3" as needed to create another Pipeline Series.

Figure 2-44. Pipeline Series

Setting Up PCS 73

Page 82: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

5 If a Pipeline Series has not been assigned to the entire length of the pipeline, click New to insert another new record and then enter the following information:

a Type a a unique number in the Series Number field that is higher than all other series numbers currently in use (Figure 2-44, page 73).

b Type starting and ending milepost numbers for the entire length of the pipeline in the Start Milepost and End Milepost fields.

In the previous figure Series Number 100 adds a 2,000 foot pipeline extension. Series Number 200 is a rough estimate of the entire length of the pipeline (Figure 2-44, page 73).

6 Click Sort to sort numbers numerically in the Series Number column.

7 Click Close to save changes and close the window.

8 Click Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility to open the Edit Data by Facility window (Figure 2-45, page 75).

9 Click a tab labeled with the facilities you want to work with (such as Test Points) and then click the Inspections tab.

10 Click View > Data View to open the Data View window. Click the Layout tab and add the fields Relative Milepost and Series Number in the grid. Click Close to close the Data View window.

11 To apply a Pipeline Series to facilities in the grid, follow these steps:

a Click the Series Number field for the facility you want to assign the Pipeline Series.

b Click the down arrow and select a Pipeline Series in the drop-down list. Repeat this step for another facility as needed.

For example, the Series Number field has been added for a facility in the CPDM Test Point Inspections grid in the next figure (Figure 2-45, page 75).

74 Setting Up PCS

Page 83: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Figure 2-45. Apply a Pipeline Series to a Facility

Themes and Themes ManagementA theme is a group of settings saved in the database for later use, such as a grid or form layout, report layout, or settings for Allegro prompts and sorting.

PCS provides system default themes and the ability to build custom themes. A custom theme is either private or public and includes a group of user-defined settings, such as certain data fields, filter options, and sorting methods. Custom themes are useful for toggling different data views when analyzing pipeline data; or having a customized grid or report available to a certain user.

System default and public themes are available to any PCS user. Custom themes are assigned to a specific PCS user ID by the system administrator. A list of all themes and the ability to assign or delete themes is available in Themes Management (Tools > Themes Management).

Topics in this section include those in the following list:

• Applying a Theme to a Grid or Report (page 76)

• Creating a Layout Theme for a Grid (page 77)

• Creating a Sorting Method Theme for a Grid (page 79)

• Creating a Report Layout Theme (page 80)

• Managing Themes (page 82)

Setting Up PCS 75

Page 84: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Applying a Theme to a Grid or ReportTo apply a theme to a grid or report, follow these steps:

1 Select the pipeline(s) you want to work with in the Select ROWs window and then click Close to close the window.

2 Display the grid or report you want to work with, such as the Edit Data by Facility grid or the PCS Delinquency Report.

3 If you are working with a grid, follow these steps (Figure 2-46):

a Click View > Data View > Options tab.

b Click Select Layout and select a layout theme from the drop-down list.

c Click Select Sorting Method and select a sorting method from the drop-down list.

d Click Close to close the window and apply changes to the grid.

Figure 2-46. Data View Theme Selection

4 If you are working with a report, follow these steps (Figure 2-47, page 77):

a Click Select Layout and select a layout theme from the drop-down list.

b Click Select Sorting Method and select a sorting method from the drop-down list.

76 Setting Up PCS

Page 85: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

c Click Close to close the window and apply changes to the grid.

Figure 2-47. Report Theme Selection

Creating a Layout Theme for a GridTo create a layout theme for a grid, follow these steps:

1 Select a pipeline segment(s) in the Select ROWs window and then click Close.

2 Open a grid such as Edit Data by Facility (Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility).

3 Click View > Data View > Layout tab > New to display the New Grid Layout window (Figure 2-48).

Figure 2-48. New Grid Layout

Setting Up PCS 77

Page 86: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

4 Complete the following steps in the New Grid Layout window:

a Type a name for the new theme.

b Copy compatible prompts (fields) from an existing public theme to the new theme. Click the arrow in the Copy all compatible prompts from field and select a public theme in the drop-down list.

c Click Ok and then click Ok again when the New Theme message displays (Figure 2-49).

Figure 2-49. New Theme Message

d Click Yes or No when the Public or Private message displays (Figure 2-50). After making a selection, the message closes and the Data View window displays.

Figure 2-50. Public or Private Theme Message

5 Add and remove fields in the new theme as needed.

Add a field by double-clicking the field in the left pane of the Data View window. To remove a field, double-click the field in the right pane to move it back to the left pane. Fields in the right pane are included in the new theme and subsequently the grid.

6 Click Save and then click Close to close the Data View window.

78 Setting Up PCS

Page 87: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Creating a Sorting Method Theme for a GridTo create a sorting method theme for a grid, follow these steps:

1 Select a pipeline segment(s) in the Select ROWs window and then click Close.

2 Open a grid such as Edit Data by Facility (Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility).

3 Click View > Customize Data View > Sorting tab.

4 Click New to display the New Theme window. Type a name for the new theme and then click OK (Figure 2-51).

Figure 2-51. New Sorting Theme

5 Click Yes or No when the Public or Private message displays (Figure 2-50, page 78).

After making a selection, the message closes and the Data View window displays.

6 Complete the following steps to set sorting properties (Figure 2-52, page 80):

a Click Edit in Sort data by.

b Click the arrow in the Sort by field and select a data field in the drop-down list.

c Click Ascending (A-Z) or Descending (Z-A).

d Click the up or down arrow to move the data field to a different position in the sorting list.

e Click the close icon (X). Click Save and then click Close to close the Data View window.

Setting Up PCS 79

Page 88: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Figure 2-52. Edit Sorting Theme

Creating a Report Layout ThemeTo create a report layout theme, follow these steps:

1 Click Reports/Graphs and open a report.

2 Click Layout tab > New to display the New Theme window. Type a name for the new theme and then click OK (Figure 2-51, page 79).

3 Click Yes or No when the Public or Private message displays (Figure 2-50, page 78).

After making a selection, the message closes and the Layout window displays.

4 Add and remove fields in the new layout theme as needed (Figure 2-53, page 81).

Add a field by double-clicking the field in the left pane of the Layout window. To remove a field, double-click the field in the right pane to move it back to the left pane. Fields in the right pane are included in the new theme and subsequently the report layout.

5 Click the arrow in Paper Settings and select properties as required.

80 Setting Up PCS

Page 89: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

6 Click the arrow in Print Options and select properties as required.

NOTE: The Options tab includes several other filter option you can use in a report. However these filter options cannot be saved in a theme; they must be enabled each time you run the report.

7 Click Save and then click Close.

Figure 2-53. Report Layout Theme

Setting Up PCS 81

Page 90: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Managing ThemesThe following procedure explains how to use Themes Management to assign user access to themes and import, export, or rename a theme.

Complete the following steps:

1 Click Tools > Themes Management (Figure 2-54).

2 Click a tab at the top and bottom of the window to select a theme category and type. For example, click the Editing tab to select a theme category and Grid Column Themes to select a theme type.

NOTE: PCS default themes display in the Entity column. Custom themes created by the system administrator (or a user ID with appropriate security privileges) display in the Theme column. Theme assignments display in the Status column.

Figure 2-54. Themes Management

3 Complete the following steps to rename, assign a theme as public or to a user, import, or export a theme:

a Rename a theme: select the theme in the Theme column and then type a new description.

82 Setting Up PCS

Page 91: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

b Assign a theme as public or to a user : click the field in the Status column and then select Public or a user ID.

c Import a theme: click Import and then use Windows Explorer to locate the file.

d Export a theme: click Export to save the theme on the computer hard drive.

4 Click Close to save changes and close the Themes Management window.

E-mail NotificationInformation in this section explains how to work with Email Notification. Topics include those in the following list:

• About Email Notification (page 84)

• Setting Properties in System Settings for Email Notification (page 85)

• Email Notification Setup (page 86)

• Regenerating Emails (page 92)

• Viewing the Email Log (page 92)

• Disabling Email Notifications (page 93)

Setting Up PCS 83

Page 92: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

About Email NotificationEmail Notification is an optional feature that runs on the master server when using Two-Way Synchronization. The master server must be running in server mode; installed with an email client such as Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express; and have a dedicated email account for sending email messages.

Based on settings in Email Notification Setup, any of the following events trigger the email client to send an email message: criteria violations, delinquency dates, pending due dates, and range violations (Table 2-14). The email message is sent to one or more designated recipients at a user-specified time. It includes an event report as an attachment to the email message. To view or print the event report, use any software program that supports HTML (hypertext markup language) format, such as Microsoft Word or Internet Explorer.

Table 2-14. Event Report Descriptions

Event Report Description

Criteria Violations Identifies facilities with criteria violations according to inspection readings entered in the following grid fields: Structure P/S, Structure IRF, Native P/S, and Protection Criteria.

Delinquency Dates Identifies facilities that are past due for inspection according to scheduling parameters set up in Define Schedules (Data Entry > Define Schedules) and the last inspection date recorded in the grid field Inspection Date and Time.

Pending Due Dates Identifies facilities due for inspection according to scheduling parameters set up in Define Schedules and the last inspection date recorded in the Inspection Date and Time grid field. The report includes all facilities due for inspection since the last email notification was sent.

Range Violations Identifies facilities due for inspection with range violations according to the minimum and maximum range values set up for a field in Field and UDF Customizations (Tools > Data Utilities > Field and UDF Customizations). The report includes all facilities with range violations since the last email notification was sent.

84 Setting Up PCS

Page 93: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Setting Properties in System Settings for Email NotificationComplete the following steps:

1 On the master server, click Terminate Server Mode if the master server is running in server mode.

2 Verify the master server is installed with an email client (Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express).

3 Verify the email client (Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express) is setup with a dedicated email account that can send email messages.

IMPORTANT: To avoid having your personal email messages delivered to the master server instead of your computer, do not use your personal, company email address when setting up Email Notification on the master server.

4 Start the email client on the master server making sure to use a dedicated email account for sending email messages.

5 Click Tools > System Settings > Email tab.

6 Verify MS Exchange Settings displays in the Setting column of Default email client name.

7 In the Setting column of Default email client password, type the password of the dedicated email account that will send email notifications.

8 In the Setting column of Time of day at which automatic email reports are sent, type the time of day the master server automatically sends email notifications. Use 24-hour time format when entering a time, such as 01:00 for 1AM or 13:00 for 1PM.

NOTE: Do not enable the option Use alternate Email Notification generator unless directed by Technical Services. Setting this option may negatively affect how PCS processes email notifications.

9 Click Close to close System Settings and save changes.

Setting Up PCS 85

Page 94: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Email Notification SetupThe process for setting up Email Notification includes the following tasks:

• Setting properties in Email Notification (page 86)

• Assigning an event notification (page 88)

• Setting properties for email client and event report (page 90)

Setting properties in Email NotificationTo setup Email Notification, complete the following steps:

1 Click Tools > Email > Email Notification Setup.

2 To add an email recipient, follow these steps:

a If the Email Recipients window is not visible, click the Email Recipients tab (Figure 2-55).

b Click the plus (+) icon near the top of the window to add an empty record.

c Type the person’s last and first name in the Last Name and First Name fields respectively. If needed, type the person’s middle initial in the Middle Initial field.

d Repeat steps "b" and "c" for each person you want to add as an email recipient.

Figure 2-55. Add New Email Recipient

86 Setting Up PCS

Page 95: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

3 To add an email address for an email recipient, follow these steps (Figure 2-56):

a Select an email recipient and then click the plus (+) icon in Selected Recipient Addresses.

b Type the person’s email address in the empty field and then press Enter. Repeat steps "a" and "b" if you need to add an email address for another email recipient.

4 Continue with the next section entitled Assigning an event notification (page 88).

Figure 2-56. Add Email Address for Email Recipient

Setting Up PCS 87

Page 96: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Assigning an event notificationComplete the following steps to assign an event notification to an email recipient:

1 Select an email recipient in the Email Recipients tab and then click the Recipient Events tab. The name of the selected email recipient displays in the top left corner of the window in the Current Recipient field (Figure 2-57).

Figure 2-57. Recipient Events

2 Assign an event for one or more pipeline segments in the following manner (Figure 2-58, page 89):

a Double-click to select a pipeline segment or a folder containing multiple pipeline segments in the Hierarchy pane. A check mark indicates a selection.

b Click New Events to add an empty record in Event Assignments.

NOTE: Bold blue text in the hierarchy tree indicates Inherited Events. These are other events assigned to the current pipeline selection.

c Click the arrow in the Event column and select an event in the drop-down list.

d Type a date in the Start Date field to indicate when PCS should begin sending email notifications.

88 Setting Up PCS

Page 97: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Figure 2-58. Pipeline Selection(s) in Recipient Events

e Indicate how often email notifications are sent. Click the Frequency field and select one of the following interval options:

• Daily: Email notification is sent every day at the same time using the time setting in the Email tab of System Settings.

• Weekly: Email notification is sent once every 7 days. First email notification is sent based on the date in the Start Date field of Event Assignments; subsequent notifications are sent 7 days apart.

• Bi-Weekly: Email notification is sent once every other week (14 days between emails). First email notification is sent based on the date in the Start Date field of Event Assignments; subsequent notifications are sent 14 days apart.

• Semi-Monthly: Email notification is sent on the first and fifteenth of every month.

• Monthly: Email notification is sent on the first of every month.

• Bi-Monthly: Email notification is sent on the first of every odd-numbered month (January 1, March 1, May 1, July 1, and so on).

• Quarterly: Email notification is sent on the first day of the first month of every quarter (January 1, April 1, July 1, and October 1).

Setting Up PCS 89

Page 98: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

f Click the Mode field and select either Full or Incremental.

Choose Full to include current and all previous events (historical data) in the event report. Choose Incremental to include only those events that have occurred since the last email notification.

3 Continue with the next section entitled Setting properties in Email Notification.

Setting properties for email client and event reportComplete the following steps:

1 Click the Settings tab in Email Notification Setup (Figure 2-58).

Figure 2-59. Settings in Email Notification Setup

2 If you want to change email client settings already setup in System Settings, complete the following steps. PCS will also automatically apply email client settings in System Settings. Likewise, changes made in System Settings automatically apply in Email Notification Setup.

a Type the name of the email client in the field labeled Default email client name.

b Type the password of the email account that can send email messages on the master server in the field labeled Default email client password.

90 Setting Up PCS

Page 99: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

c Using 24-hour time format, type a time in the time-of-day field that identifies when PCS should automatically send email reports. Examples of 24-hour time format are 01:00 for 1AM and 13:00 for 1PM.

3 If you want to change the title of an event report, select an event’s title listed in Report Title Overrides and then type a new description.

For example, select Criteria Violation and then type a new description. Repeat this step as needed to change the title of other event reports.

4 If you want to change the font type, font size, or colors used in an event report, complete the following steps:

a Click the down arrow in Report Font and Base Font Size and select a font in the drop-down list (Figure 2-60). Repeat this step using the adjacent field to select a new font size. Clicking Reset applies PCS default settings.

b If you want to change the color of the report, text, or any table color property, click the respective color box in Report Colors to select a new color in the color palette. Click OK to close the palette and apply changes.

As an alternate method for selecting a new color, type any HTML hexidecimal value in a color field, such as Header Text, and then press Enter to apply changes.

Figure 2-60. Event Report Properties

Setting Up PCS 91

Page 100: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Regenerating EmailsTo resend the last successful email report to recipients, follow these steps:

1 If the master server is running in server mode, click Terminate Server Mode.

2 Click Tools > Email > Regenerate Emails (Figure 2-61).

Figure 2-61. Regenerate Emails

3 Type the date of the last successful email sent to recipients in the date field and then click Generate.

4 Click Yes when the Regenerate message displays to resend email reports.

5 Click Close to close the Regenerate Emails window and then click Tools > Synchronize > Server Mode to place the master server in server mode.

Viewing the Email LogComplete the following steps to view the email log:

1 If the master server is running in server mode, click Terminate Server Mode.

2 Click Tools > Email Log (Figure 2-62).

3 If you want to clear all entries in the email log, click Clear Log.

Figure 2-62. Email Log

92 Setting Up PCS

Page 101: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Disabling Email NotificationsIf you want to stop the master server from sending email reports to recipients, complete the following steps:

1 If the master server is running in server mode, click Terminate Server Mode.

2 Click Tools > System Settings > E-mail tab.

3 Click the check box in the Setting column for Disable all e-mail notifications (Figure 2-63).

Email reporting is disabled when a check mark appears in the check box. To enable email reporting, click the check box again to remove the check mark.

Figure 2-63. Disable Email Notifications

Setting Up PCS 93

Page 102: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Notes

94 Setting Up PCS

Page 103: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

3

Using Grids and Forms

This chapter includes a description of grids and forms available in the Cathodic Protection Data Manager (CPDM) module. Topics include those in the following list:

• Grids and Forms

• Grid Overview (page 96)

• Form Overview (page 100)

• Working with a Grid and Form (page 101)

• Form Designer (page 102)

• Set Up a Grid or Form for Data Entry (page 108)

Grids and FormsGrids and forms allow you to display and edit data for facilities linked to a pipeline segment. Facility types include test points, rectifiers, foreign bonds, galvanic anodes, and tanks. The CPDM module provides the following methods for viewing and editing data:

• by facility (Data Entry > Edit CP Data by Facility)

• by route (Data Entry > Edit CP Data by Route)

• by schedule (Data Entry > Edit CP Data by Schedule)

95

Page 104: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Grid OverviewA grid is similar to a spreadsheet. It includes columns, rows, and fields for several records (Figure 3-1). It is also referred to as a data grid or data entry grid.

To work with data in a grid:

1 Click Data Entry > Edit CP Data by Facility, Route, or Schedule.

2 Click View > Dynamic Forms and Grids > Grid Only.

Figure 3-1. Test Points Inspections Grid

CPDM grids include the following three tabs at the bottom of the window (Figure 3-1):

• Information: Use this grid to add and edit permanent facility information, such as milepost, location description, operating status (active or inactive), and protection criteria. It also allows you to specify which fields display in the Inspections grid. For example, to enter structure pipe-to-soil readings for a record in the Inspections grid, first enable the Record Structure P/S field for the record in the Information grid.

• Inspections: Use the Inspections grid to add and edit facility inspection readings. The grid supports multiple inspection readings for each facility.

• Maintenance: Use the Maintenance grid to add and edit maintenance information. It maintains history records for facility repairs.

96 Using Grids and Forms

Page 105: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Column Heading Color LegendColumn headings in grids use certain colors to indicate a particular type of data. See the next table for details Table 3-1.

Grid Button Bar DescriptionUse the button bar at the top of the grid to perform any of the tasks described in the following paragraphs (Figure 3-1, page 96). If you are unable to perform a task, your PCS Administrator may need to re-evaluate your current access privileges.

ViewClick View to display a menu of options for the current grid. Menu options include:

• Displaying the Data View, Customize Data View, and Facility Manager windows.

• Adding a Search tool bar to the grid.

• Building a survey.

• Printing a copy of the current grid.

• Deleting and undeleting all inspection records for the current grid.

Table 3-1. Column Heading Color Legend

Color/Font Style Data Type

Black Permanent Information

Blue History Record Information

Red Inspection and Maintenance Fields

Green Hierarchy Field

Purple Multi-link Field

An example of a multi-link field is a rectifier link on a ROW in the main grid or mini-grid of the Rectifiers Inspections grid.

Bold Required Field

Italics User Defined Field (UDF)

Using Grids and Forms 97

Page 106: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

• Displaying Dynamic Forms and Grids.

• Changing grid appearance properties, such as grid color and button labels.

• Running a Record Change History report.

RefreshClick Refresh to resort the grid using a sorting method selected in the Options tab of Data View (View > Data View > Options > Select Sorting Method).

NewClick New to display the Add Record window to perform either of the following tasks:

• Add a new record in the grid for a selected facility.

• Add a new facility and a record in the grid.

DeleteClick Delete to display the Delete Record window to perform either of the following tasks:

• Delete a record for a selected facility.

• Delete a facility and all related records (information, inspection, and maintenance records) for a selected facility.

UndeleteIf a grid is set up to display deleted records (View > Data View > Options), selecting a deleted record in the grid and then clicking Undelete restores the record.

IMPORTANT: Undelete is unavailable for selection after running Reindex/Compress All Databases (File > Database Cleanup). Reindex/Compress All Databases permanently deletes records from the database.

CloseClick Close to exit the grid and display the Current Selections window.

98 Using Grids and Forms

Page 107: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Mini-Grid OverviewLike PCS data grids, mini-grids are similar to a spreadsheet in appearance. They include data columns, rows, and fields for organizing and managing data related to a facility type, such as rectifiers. The CPDM module provides the following mini-grids:

• Rectifiers Information mini-grids: The Rectifiers Information grid includes the mini-grids labeled: ROW Links, Test Point Linking, Rectifier Anode Information, Rectifier Negative Information, and Rectifier Current Distributions. Use these mini-grids to: (1) link rectifiers to a pipeline; (2) view test points linked to a rectifier; (3) add and delete records for impressed anodes and negatives linked to a rectifier; and (4) add and delete record for pipeline current distribution.

• Rectifiers Inspections mini-grids: The Rectifiers Inspections grid includes the Rectifier Anode Inspection and Rectifier Negative Inspection mini-grids. Use these mini-grids to enter inspection readings for rectifier anode(s) and negatives linked to one or more pipeline segments.

• Scheduling Facility Type mini-grid: This mini-grid is available in the Information grid of all PCS modules. Scheduling properties in Edit Schedule Settings can be overridden at the facility level using the Scheduling Facility Types mini-grid.

Use the buttons in the mini-grid toolbar to (1) hide a mini-grid; (2) change the position of a mini-grid; (3) or change the data view of a mini-grid.

To hide or display a mini-grid:

• Click the down arrow in the title bar of the mini-grid to minimize the mini-grid. To display the mini-grid, click the button labeled with the name of the mini-grid near the bottom of the window.

To change the position of a mini-grid:

• Click the right/left arrow in the title bar of the mini-grid to move the mini-grid to the right or left.

To change the data view of a mini-grid:

• Click the data view button in the title bar of the mini-grid to open the Data View window. To add fields in a mini-grid, double-click a field in the left pane to move the field to the right pane. To remove a field in a mini-grid, double-click a field in the right pane to move it to the left pane. All fields in the right pane are included in the mini-grid.

Using Grids and Forms 99

Page 108: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Form OverviewA form displays all fields related to a single record on a single page. For example, the following figure shows fields related only to milepost 10+05 (Figure 3-2).

Navigation buttons near the top of the form allow you to view the first, previous, next, or last facility record for a selected pipeline segment. Command buttons in the button bar (View, Sort, New, and so on) and the Information, Inspections, and Maintenance tabs perform the same functions described earlier in Grid Overview (page 96).

To work with data using only a form:

1 Click Data Entry > Edit CP Data by Facility, Route, or Schedule.

2 Click View > Dynamic Forms and Grids > Form Only.

Figure 3-2. Test Points Inspections Form

100 Using Grids and Forms

Page 109: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Working with a Grid and FormYou can display data in a grid and form at the same time (Figure 3-3). The grid and form synchronize when browsing records or entering data in a record. For example, when editing a record in a grid, the same record displays and updates in the form. The same is true for the grid when editing a record in the form.

To work with data using a grid and form:

1 Click Data Entry > Edit CP Data by Facility, Route, or Schedule.

2 Click View > Dynamic Forms and Grids > Grid and Form.

Figure 3-3. Test Points Inspections Grid and Form

Using Grids and Forms 101

Page 110: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Form DesignerThe form designer provides several tools for creating a data entry form. The following figure shows an example of the form designer (Figure 3-4). The design area is located in the center of the window. This is where you build the form. Several controls, fields, and layout tools surround the design area; use these to build the form and set field properties. See Table 3-2, page 102 and Figure 3-4, page 102 for more information.

Figure 3-4. Form Designer

The following table identifies the various controls and layout tools used to build a form (Table 3-2).

Table 3-2. Form Designer Fields and Tools

Name Description

Controls Select and drag any of the following Controls to the design area to add it in a form:

• Grid: Adds a grid for data entry that links to a sub-grid in the current data entry grid. Grid is available only for data entry grids that include a sub-grid, such as the Rectifier Inspections grid. After adding a Grid, select a Data Source in Properties, such as Rectifier Anode Inspections or Rectifier Negative Inspections.

102 Using Grids and Forms

Page 111: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

• Picture: Adds an image in the form. To replace the PCS logo, use Properties to select a different image, such as your company’s logo

• Label: Adds a label field with the default description Label. Use Properties to change the description and apply text formatting.

• Rectangle: Adds a rectangle field in the form. Use Properties to apply formatting, such as a border.

• Tabs: Adds tab fields in the form. Use Properties to add new tab fields and apply formatting. Drag and drop one or more fields in a tab, such as Label, Grid, AC Input, or Address.

Fields Select and drag a field to the design area to add it in a form.

Design Area The design area is the container for fields and controls included in a form. You can also change the form’s appearance by moving and organizing items selected in the design area. Select one or more items and then use buttons in Layout Tools to align and arrange items. Or, press Delete on the computer keyboard to delete items in the design area and subsequently the form.

Layout Tools Place the mouse over a button to view a description of the button (Figure 3-5, page 105). Use Layout Tools to organize one or more items selected in the design area. Click to select an item or drag a selection over several items.

Properties Use Properties to change settings for an item selected in the design area.

Source, Layout, New Layout, and Delete Layout

Source: Information field showing the name of the selected data entry grid.

Layout: Information field showing the name of the current form. Default displays when using the default form.

New Layout: Click to create a new form.

Delete Layout: Click to delete the current form.

Table 3-2. Form Designer Fields and Tools (continued)

Name Description

Using Grids and Forms 103

Page 112: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Form Size, Form Color, and Set Tab Orders

Form Size: Type a value in the Width and Height fields to specify the size of the form.

Form Color : Click to display the Color palette and choose a background color for the form.

Form Size, Form Color, and Set Tab Orders (continued)

Set Tab Orders: Click to activate tab-order selection mode in the form. A red box with a number appears in the upper-left corner of each field. Click each field sequentially to establish a tab order. Pressing the Tab key when using the form moves the cursor from one field to another based on the tab order you set up.

Recover Lost Items When you move a field or control outside of the design area, it is no longer visible or available for selection. Click Recover Lost Items to have the field or control automatically placed in the upper-left corner of the design area.

Import and Export Import:Click Import and follow on-screen prompts to import a form.

Export:Click Export and follow on-screen prompts to export a form.

Save and Close Click Save to save the current form. Click Close to exit form designer and display the current data entry grid.

Table 3-2. Form Designer Fields and Tools (continued)

Name Description

104 Using Grids and Forms

Page 113: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

The next figure identifies buttons in the Layout Tools toolbar (Figure 3-5). Placing the mouse over a button displays a tool tip with a description of the button. Use these buttons to organize items selected in the design area and subsequently the form. Click to select an item in the design area or drag a selection around multiple items.

Figure 3-5. Layout Tools in Form Designer

Creating a FormInformation in this section explains how to create a form. Tasks include those described in the following sections:

• Open the form designer

• Create a new form (page 106)

• Import an existing form (page 106)

• Set up form size and color (page 107)

• Add controls and fields in a form (page 107)

• Arrange items in a form (page 107)

• Export a form (page 107)

Using Grids and Forms 105

Page 114: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Open the form designer1 Open a grid, such as Edit Data by Facility (Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility).

2 Select the type of grid you want to work with, such as Test Points Inspections grid (Test Points tab > Inspections tab).

3 Click View > Dynamic Forms and Grids. Select either Grid and Form or Form Only.

4 Click View > Dynamic Forms and Grids > Edit Form Layout to display the form designer (Figure 3-4, page 102).

Create a new form1 Click New Layout to open the New Layout window (Figure 3-6).

2 Type a name for the new form. Click OK to save the form and close the window.

Figure 3-6. New Form Layout

Import an existing formComplete the following steps if you want to import all items and settings from an existing form to a new form:

1 Click Import and then click Yes when the following message displays:

Warning: Importing a form will completely replace all items, property and form settings associated with the current layout. Continue?

2 When the Open window displays, locate the form and click OK. Click OK again when the Import Completed message displays.

106 Using Grids and Forms

Page 115: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Set up form size and color1 Type a value in the Width and Height fields of Form Size (inches) to set the size

of the form.

2 Click the Form Color box to display a color palette. Select a color in the palette to set the background color of the form.

3 Click Save to save settings.

Add controls and fields in a form1 Select and drag any item listed in Controls and Fields to the design area. Repeat

this step to add additional items as needed.

2 Select an item in the design area and then select settings in Properties. Repeat this step for each item in the design area.

3 Click Save.

Arrange items in a form1 Click to select an item in the design area or drag a selection around multiple items.

2 Use Layout Tools to arrange items in the design area and subsequently the form layout. Placing the mouse over a button displays a tooltip with a description of the button.

3 Click Save.

Export a form1 Click Export.

2 When the Save As window displays, type a name for the form in the Export file field.

3 Select a folder on your computer to save the form. Click the arrow in the Save in field and navigate to the folder.

4 Click Save.

Using Grids and Forms 107

Page 116: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Set Up a Grid or Form for Data EntrySeveral options are available for setting up a grid or form for data entry. Options include those described in the following sections:

• Choose a layout and sorting theme

• Choose which records to display (page 109)

• Create a layout theme from an existing theme (page 109)

• Use facility manager in a grid or form (page 110)

• Set up search in a grid or form (page 110)

Choose a layout and sorting theme1 Open a grid or form.

2 Click View > Data View > Options tab.

3 Click the Select Layout field select a layout theme in the drop-down list.

4 Click the Select Sorting Method field and select a sorting method in the drop-down list.

5 Select an option in Sort Dates to specify how PCS sorts facility inspection dates in a grid or form. Select Oldest First to sort by the oldest inspection date or Newest First to sort by the newest inspection date.

108 Using Grids and Forms

Page 117: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Choose which records to display1 Indicate which records to display in a grid or form in Records and Facilities. Select

Non-Deleted Only, Deleted Only, or All.

2 If you want to display only those facilities that have inspection records, click Only facilities with inspection records.

3 If you want to display only the most recent facility record, click Only the most recent record for each facility.

4 Click Ad Hoc Filter if you want to set up an optional filter for a specific record type and condition. Click the down arrow and select a record type in the drop-down list. Click the down arrow in the adjacent field and select a condition in the drop-down list.

For example, to view records with a missing milepost number, select Milepost and Is Missing. Only those records with a missing milepost number display in the grid or form.

Create a layout theme from an existing theme1 Open a grid or form.

2 Click View > Data View > Layout tab > New.

3 When the New Grid Layout window opens, complete the following steps:

a Type a name for the new layout theme.

b Click the down arrow in Copy all compatible prompts from. Select an existing layout theme in the drop-down list and then click OK.

c Click OK when the New Theme message displays to create the new layout theme.

d When the Public or Private message displays, click Yes if you want to make the new layout theme public or No if you want to make it private.

NOTE: PCS stores layout themes on the same computer used to create the layout theme. A public theme is available to anyone that uses the computer. A private theme is available only to the PCS user that created the theme.

4 If you want to add one or more fields to the new layout theme, double-click the field in the left pane of the Data View window. This moves the field to the right pane, which lists all fields currently in the new layout theme.

Using Grids and Forms 109

Page 118: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

5 If you want to remove one or more fields, double-click the field in the right pane of the Data View window. This moves the field back to the left pane.

6 If you want to arrange the order in which fields display in the grid or form, select a field in the right pane of the Data View window. Click and drag the field button to a new position in the list and subsequently the grid or form.

7 Click Save.

Use facility manager in a grid or form1 Open a grid or form.

2 Click View > Facility Manager.

Facility Manager lists all facilities for all PCS modules in a grid next to the current grid or form. Use Facility Manager to view and edit any facility assigned to a pipeline segment. For example, while working in the Inspections grid of CPDM, use Facility Manager to view and edit any atmospheric facility in ACM module.

Set up search in a grid or form1 Open a grid or form.

2 Click View > Search.

3 Set up search parameters. Click the down arrow and select a field in the drop-down list. Type a search condition in the adjacent field. Repeat this step as needed using additional search fields.

NOTE: Clicking an operator button cycles through available operator selections. Use operators when setting up search parameters. For example, click AND to display OR and vice versa. Placing the mouse over an operator displays a tooltip with a description of the operator.

110 Using Grids and Forms

Page 119: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Notes

Using Grids and Forms 111

Page 120: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

112 Using Grids and Forms

Page 121: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

4

Schedule

This chapter explains how to create and use a schedule for facility inspections. Topics include those in the following list:

• Schedule Overview

• Schedule Criteria (page 114)

• Print a PCS Schedule Report (page 117)

• Generate a Schedule for Data Entry (page 119)

• Transfer a Schedule to the Allegro (page 120)

Schedule OverviewA schedule is a group of facilities due for inspection within a certain survey period. The schedule can include different types of facilities as well as different survey periods. For example, a schedule might include test points, rectifiers, and bonds. The survey period for these facility types may require monthly, bi-monthly, annual, and multi-year inspections all within the same year.

A schedule is based on a schedule definition you create. The schedule definition includes facilities due for inspection and the survey period of each facility. PCS provides default settings for different survey periods based on current compliance regulations. You can use default settings or change settings to match your company’s survey policy. A schedule definition allows PCS to dynamically generate the most current, up-to-date schedule. You can use the same schedule definition for different facilities and survey periods.

The process for creating and using a schedule includes the following tasks:

• Setup scheduling criteria, such as a survey period, grace period, and months between survey.

113

Page 122: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

• Create a schedule definition.

• Transfer the schedule to the Allegro Field PC for field data collection. Or print a copy of the schedule for recording inspection readings in the field.

• After completing the field survey, transfer inspection readings from the Allegro to PCS. You can also manually enter or edit inspection readings using the Edit CP Data by Schedule grid (Data Entry > Edit CP Data by Schedule).

Schedule CriteriaScheduling criteria determines the survey frequency for each facility type, such as test points, rectifiers, bonds, and so on. It includes settings for survey period, grace period, months between surveys, target month, and target year.

PCS provides default settings that apply system-wide to all facility types. These settings are based on current compliance regulations. You can however change default settings to match your company’s survey policy.

Procedures in this section explain how to complete the following tasks:

• Set up schedule criteria

• Create a schedule definition (page 117)

Set up schedule criteria If the facility types you plan to include in a schedule definition use different scheduling criteria than PCS default settings, complete the following steps to set up scheduling criteria:

1 Click Data Entry > Edit Schedule Settings > Months Between Survey Settings tab.

2 Review information in the next table and then change PCS default settings as needed (Table 4-1, page 115). To change a value, click a field and then type a new value. Gray-color fields are unavailable for editing. When you finish, continue with step 3 on page 116.

114 Schedule

Page 123: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Table 4-1. Months Between Surveys Field Descriptions

Field Description

Months Between Surveys A list of survey periods based on current compliance regulations. These and other gray fields, such as Grace Period Units, are unavailable for selection

Grace Period Amount of time allowed to perform a survey when the survey period is past due.

Grace Period Units Time measurement of grace period in days or months.

Early Survey Limit (Days) Refers to how soon you can take a survey and still meet scheduling requirements.

For example, if an annual survey is due in June and the “early survey limit” is 30 days, a May reading satisfies scheduling requirements whereas an April reading does not. If an April reading is entered in the database, PCS automatically schedules the survey again in June.

Multi-Year Survey Start (Year)

PCS uses the year 2000 as the default starting year for multi-year surveys. The year for future multi-year surveys is calculated based on the survey period you specify in the Months Between Survey column.

For example, when using 2000 as the starting year with a survey period of 24 months between surveys, PCS calculates the survey dates as 2000, 2002, 2004, 2006 and so on. The starting year is included in the calculation.

When working with a ten year survey (120 months) and you want the Target Year to match the year an inspection is due, use 2001 as the starting year instead of 2000. For example, when using 2001 as the starting year and 5 as the Target Year when the inspection is due, PCS calculates the inspection year as 2005. The starting year is included in the calculation.

Inspection Older Than (Years)

Minimum Percent Scheduled

Applies to multi-year surveys. If the last inspection is older than a specified number of years, you can set up a multi-year schedule to include a minimum percentage of facilities to be surveyed in the next multi-year survey.

For example, if the last inspection for a Ten Year survey is older than 3 years, a minimum of 50 percent of facilities need to be inspected for the next scheduled multi-year survey.

Schedule 115

Page 124: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

3 Click the ROW and Facility Settings tab.

4 Select facility types in System Facility Types Filter that you want to edit schedule settings. Click Select All or click the check box for each desired facility type.

NOTE: Current schedule settings display in Manage PCS scheduling facility types. Hierarchy folders and pipeline segments listed in Hierarchy Filter display in blue text to indicate which of these items are affected by current selections in System Facility Types Filter.

5 Complete the following steps in Manage PCS scheduling facility types to change schedule settings system-wide for facility types selected in System Facility Types Filter.

a Click the Scheduling Priority field to reveal a down arrow. Click the down arrow and select a value from 1-10 in the drop-down list to set a scheduling priority level for the selected facility.

b Complete settings in the remaining fields as required, such as Months Between Surveys, Target Month, and so on.

6 If you want to override default settings for one or more pipeline segments in the same hierarchy folder, complete the following steps in Override scheduling facility type settings for specific ROWs and folders:

a Double-click to select a pipeline segment in Hierarchy Filter. To multi-select additional pipeline segments in the same hierarchy folder, press Shift and double-click each additional pipeline segment.

b Select a field in Schedule Settings to reveal a down arrow, such as Months Between Surveys or Target Month. Click the down arrow and select an option from the drop-down list.

NOTE: When multi-selected pipeline segments have different schedule settings, Multi displays in the Selected field; current settings also display in Expanded Multi Settings.

7 Continue with the next section to create a schedule definition.

116 Schedule

Page 125: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Create a schedule definition1 Click Select ROWs to open the Select ROWs window. Select one or more pipeline

segments with facilities you want to schedule for inspection and then click Close.

2 Click Data Entry > Define Schedules > New.

3 Type a name for the new schedule in the New Schedule window and then click OK.

4 Select facility types to include in the schedule definition. Double-click a facility type in Available Facility Types to move it to Selected Facility Types.

5 If you want to distribute a percentage of facilities for inspection, click Level out workload for multi-year schedules when using X / Y% method.

The percentage value (Y%) is set up in Manage PCS scheduling facility types for the field Percent Needed to Complete Survey (Data Entry > Edit Schedule Settings > ROW and Facility Settings > Percent Needed to Complete Survey).

Print a PCS Schedule ReportInformation in this section explains how to print a columnar PCS Schedule Report. Tasks you perform include those in the following list:

• Set up report options

• Set up report layout (page 119)

The PCS Schedule Report shows which facilities are scheduled for inspection and which are delinquent or past due for inspection. You have the option of viewing and printing the report in two different formats. One format shows a monthly overview while the other format includes more detailed information.

Set up report options1 Click Select ROWs to open the Select ROWs window. Select one or more pipeline

segments with facilities you want to schedule for inspection and then click Close.

2 Click Reports/Graph > PCS Reports > PCS Schedule Report.

3 Click the Columnar Report tab.

4 Click the Options tab and then select a schedule listed in Select Schedule.

5 Type a date in the Start Date and End Date fields to have the report include facilities due for inspection based on a particular time period.

Schedule 117

Page 126: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

6 Click the option XY due dates calculated from selected ROWs only if you want due dates calculated based on your ROW selection instead of the X years/y% setting for facility types in Edit Schedule Settings.

NOTE: XY due dates refers to inspections older than X years with a minimum of Y percent scheduled for inspection. In PCS see Data Entry > Edit Schedule Settings > ROW and Facility Settings > Manage PCS scheduling facility types > Schedule Method Based On > X years/y%.

7 Click the down arrow in Select Layout and choose a report layout in the drop-down list.

8 Select a sorting method for the report. Click the down arrow in Select Sorting Method and choose a sorting method in the drop-down list.

9 Select the method PCS should use to sort inspection due dates. Click Oldest First or Newest First in Sort Dates.

10 Click Print Calendar View if you want to print or view the report in a monthly calendar view. The report identifies the total number of facilities due for inspection by calendar month.

NOTE: When the Calendar View, the report may flag facility inspections with the letters S and D. Facilities scheduled for inspection are flagged with the letter S. Facilities that are delinquent or past due for inspection are flagged with the letter D.

11 Click Print Schedule Details if you want to print or view a detailed schedule of facilities for inspection. Information includes last inspection date and schedule due date, delinquent date, and months between surveys.

12 Click Ad Hoc Filter if you want to set up an optional filter for a specific record type and condition. Click the down arrow and select a record type in the drop-down list. Click the down arrow in the adjacent field and select a condition in the drop-down list.

For example, to include records with a missing milepost number, select Milepost and Is Missing.

13 Click the Layout tab and then continue with the next section to setup a report layout.

118 Schedule

Page 127: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Set up report layout1 Select which fields to include in the report. Double-click to open a field category in

Available Fields, such as All Fields. Double-click a field to move it to Selected Fields. The report includes all fields listed in Selected Fields.

NOTE: If you want to remove a field from the report, double-click the field in Selected Fields to move it back to Available Fields.

2 Arrange fields in the report. Report fields are arranged in the same order as those listed in Selected Fields. To move a field to a different position in the list and subsequently the report, click and drag a field button to a different position.

3 Click Paper Settings and Print Options.

4 Set up Paper Settings such as Size, Orientation, Fonts & Sizes, Column Spacing, and so on. When choosing options, view Width Remaining and Report Paper Size Estimate to determine if you need to adjust settings.

5 Set up Print Options such as Insert Lines Between Groups, Page Breaks, Reprint group headings on each page, and so on.

6 Click the favorites icon in the bottom right hand corner of the window if you want to add the report to your favorites (Reports/Graphs > My Favorite Reports).

7 Click Preview to run the report. If you selected Calendar View earlier, the Paper Options window opens. Change settings as needed and then click Print to display the report. Clicking Cancel aborts report preview.

8 Click File > Print.

Generate a Schedule for Data EntryWhen the Field Data Collection Report is generated from a schedule for a field survey, you can use the same schedule to build a grid for data entry. The grid presents records in the same order as those in the printed copy of the report.

Complete the following steps to build a grid for data entry using a generated schedule:

1 Click Select ROWs to open the Select ROWs window. Select one or more pipeline segments with facilities you want to work with and then click Close.

2 Click Data Entry > Edit Atmospheric Inspection Data by Schedule.

Schedule 119

Page 128: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

3 Select a schedule in Select Schedule.

4 Using the same date range as the schedule definition, type a start and end date in the Start Date and End Date fields and then click Generate.

5 To enter inspection readings:

a Select a pipeline segment and then click New to open the Add Record window.

b Click Add and then enter inspection data in the new record. Repeat step 5 as needed for each additional inspection reading.

6 If you want PCS to automatically add information in the Inspection Date and Time and Survey fields based on scheduling criteria, complete the following steps:

a Click Build Survey.

b Select Automatic Assignment and then click Assign Survey and Assign Periodic Survey and Year.

c Click Continue to have PCS automatically populate the grid with the correct due date and annual or multi-year survey based on scheduling criteria.

PCS populates the grid with the correct due date and annual or multi-year survey based on scheduling criteria.

Transfer a Schedule to the AllegroComplete the following steps to transfer a schedule to the Allegro for field data collection:

1 Click Select ROWs to open the Select ROWs window. Select one or more pipeline segments with facilities you want to work with and then click Close.

2 Click Field Computer > Send Survey/Route > Send Survey/Route.

3 Click Schedule in Send Based On and then select a schedule in Select Schedule.

4 Click the down arrow in Select Prompts and select a prompts theme in the drop-down list.

5 Click the down arrow in Select Sorting Method and select a sorting method theme in the drop-down list.

6 Type a start and end date in the Start Date and End Date fields.

120 Schedule

Page 129: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

7 Click the option XY due dates calculated from selected ROWs only if you want due dates calculated based on your ROW selection instead of the X years/y% setting for facility types in Edit Schedule Settings.

NOTE: XY due dates refers to inspections older than X years with a minimum of Y percent scheduled for inspection. In PCS see Data Entry > Edit Schedule Settings > ROW and Facility Settings > Manage PCS scheduling facility types > Schedule Method Based On > X years/y%.

8 If you want to set up one or more optional filters, complete the following steps:

a Click the arrow in Optional Filters.

b If you want the schedule to only include certain milepost numbers, click Milepost is between. Type the starting and ending milepost number in the adjacent fields.

c Click Ad Hoc Filter if you want to set up an optional filter for a specific record type and condition. Click the down arrow and select a record type in the drop-down list. Click the down arrow in the adjacent field(s) and select a condition in the drop-down list.

9 Click Generate and then click Yes when the Generate Schedule message displays.

The status message Generating Schedule... displays at the bottom of the window and then PCS displays a list of facilities in Facilities in Generated Schedule.

10 Type a name for the file that transfers to the Allegro in the Output File field making sure to include the .dat file extension.

11 Click the option Send to Allegro.

12 Complete the following steps in Facilities in Generated Schedule to select which facilities to transfer to the Allegro:

a To send all facilities, press and hold the Shift key and then select the first and last record. Selected records are highlighted in blue.

b To send certain facilities, press and hold the Ctrl key while selecting records.

13 Click Send to transfer the schedule to the Allegro.

14 Click OK when the message Send process completed displays. The file stores in the PsData folder on the Allegro.

Schedule 121

Page 130: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Notes

122 Schedule

Page 131: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

5

Routes

This chapter explains how to create and use a route for facility inspections. Topics include those in the following list:

• Routes Overview

• Create a New Route (page 124)

• Set Up Customize Prompts and Sorting (page 125)

• Transfer a Route to the Allegro Field PC (page 126)

• Print a Route (page 127)

• Import or Export a Route (page 130)

• Build a Route for Allegro Timed Readings (page 131)

• Build a Route for Allegro Inspection GPS Readings (page 137)

123

Page 132: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Routes OverviewA PCS route is a group of facilities arranged in geographic order for field data collection. Several sorting options are available when creating a route, such as sorting by survey group, facility ID, address, milepost, or ROW code. By default PCS sorts facilities numerically by ROW Code and Pipe, and then by milepost.

The process for creating and using a PCS route includes the following items:

• Create and print a new route (Data Entry > Define Routes).

• Transfer a route to the Allegro Field PC.

• Print a survey form or data collection sheet in route order for field data collection.

• Enter inspection data in PCS in route order from a survey form or data collection sheet.

Create a New RouteComplete the following steps:

1 Click Select ROWs to open the Select ROWs window. Select one or more pipeline segments with facilities you want to work with and then click Close.

2 Click Data Entry > Define Routes > New to open the New Route window.

3 Type a name for the new route and then click OK. The name of the new route displays in the Survey Routes drop-down list.

4 On the right side of the window, click the toggle arrow in Available Facilities: Sorting and Filtering to view facility types and filter options available for selection.

5 Select which facility types you want to work with in Available Facilities: Sorting and Filtering. Click Show active facilities only if you want PCS to display only active facilities. A list of facilities display in Available Facilities.

6 Choose how you want PCS to sort facilities listed in Available Facilities. Select a Sort By option, such as Address, Milepost Only, or Facility ID.

7 If you want PCS to display linked test points with rectifiers in Available Facilities, click Automatically include test points when adding rectifiers.

124 Routes

Page 133: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

8 If any facility listed in Available Facilities is part of a Survey Group, and you want to view all facilities assigned to the Survey Group, click Automatically include all facilities in a Survey Group.

9 Click the check box in the Include column of Available Facilities for each facility you want to include in the new route. PCS displays facilities currently included in the new route in Facilities in this Route.

10 To change the survey order of facilities listed in Facilities in this Route, click and drag a facility’s move button to move the facility to a different position in the list.

11 Click Save.

Set Up Customize Prompts and SortingComplete the following steps:

1 Click Field Computer > Send Survey/Route > Customize Prompts and Sorting.

2 Click New to create a new Allegro Prompts Theme or click the down arrow in Allegro Prompt Themes and select an existing theme in the drop-down list.

3 Click the down arrow in Facility Type and select a facility type in the drop-down list, such as.

4 Complete the following steps in Facility, Information and ROW Fields to add information fields in the file that transfers to the Allegro:

a Click a category to view a list of fields available for selection. For example, click Test Point Facility Fields.

b Double-click an information field to move it to the right pane. Repeat this step for each additional field as required. The right pane lists all fields that will be included in the file that transfers to the Allegro.

5 Complete the following steps in Inspection and Maintenance Fields to add inspection and maintenance fields in the file that transfers to the Allegro:

a Click Test Point Inspection Fields to view a list of fields available for selection.

b Double-click an inspection field to move it to the right pane. Repeat this step for each additional field as required. The right pane lists all fields that will be included in the file that transfers to the Allegro.

Routes 125

Page 134: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

c Click the close icon (–) to close the list of inspection fields in Test Point Inspection Fields.

d Click the open icon (+) for the category Test Point Maintenance Fields to view a list of maintenance fields available for selection. Repeat step 5 “a” through “c” to add maintenance fields in the file that transfers to the Allegro.

6 Complete the following steps to add Site String fields. These fields help identify one facility from another, such as Facility ID and Location Description. They are included with each facility and can be viewed in the Site List window on the Allegro.

a Click the toggle arrow in Site String to expand the window.

b Click to open a category listed in the left pane of the window to view fields available for selection. For example, click All Fields, ROW Permanent Information Fields, or Facility Fields.

c Double-click a field to move it to the right pane of the window. Repeat this step for each field you want to include in the Site List. For example, double-click Facility ID and Location Description. Fields in the right pane are included in the Site List.

7 If required, repeat steps 3 through 6 to set up prompts for another facility type.

8 Click Save to save settings and then click Close to close the Customize Prompts and Sorting window.

Transfer a Route to the Allegro Field PCComplete the following steps:

1 Click Select ROWs to open the Select ROWs window. Select one or more pipeline segments with facilities you want to work with and then click Close.

2 Click Field Computer > Send Survey/Route > Send Survey/Route.

3 Click Routes in Send Based On to display a list of routes. Select a route and then click Refresh Facilities List.

4 Click the arrow in Select Prompts and select a prompts theme in the drop-down list.

5 Click the arrow in Select Sorting Method and select a sorting method theme in the drop-down list.

126 Routes

Page 135: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

6 Type a name for the output file in the Output File field making sure to include the .dat file extension.

7 Click the option Send to Allegro.

8 If you want to include only certain facilities in the output file based on particular criteria, click the toggle arrow in Optional Filters and then complete the following steps. An updated list of facilities display in Facilities in Selected Routes.

a To include facilities for a particular milepost range, type a beginning and ending milepost number in the Milepost is between fields.

b Click Ad Hoc to filter facilities based on user-defined settings. Click the down arrow and select a data type in the drop-down list. Click the down arrow in the adjacent field and select a condition in the drop-down list.

9 Click Send to transfer the file to the Allegro. When the message Send process completed displays, click OK.

NOTE: PCS transfers the output file to the PsData folder on the Allegro. On the Allegro MX, tap Start > File Explorer > AI > PsData. For the Allegro CX, tap C_Drive > BTS > PsData.

Print a RouteInformation in this section explains how to print a route. Topics include those in the following list:

• Print a CPDM Data Collection Report

• Print a Route Definition or Unrouted Facilities Report (page 129)

Print a CPDM Data Collection ReportThe following information explains how to print a Data Collection Report based on a route. A printed copy of the report can be used to record survey data in the field. When field data collection is complete, the same report can be used later for entering survey data in PCS.

Complete the following steps:

1 Click Select ROWs to open the Select ROWs window. Select one or more pipeline segments with facilities you want to work with and then click Close.

Routes 127

Page 136: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

2 Click Reports/Graphs > CPDM Reports > CPDM Data Collection Report > Options tab.

3 Click Routes in Report Based on and then select a route in the adjacent window.

4 Click the down arrow in Select Layout and choose a report layout in the drop-down list.

5 Select a sorting method for the report. Click the down arrow in Select Sorting Method and choose a sorting method in the drop-down list.

6 Click Oldest First or Newest First to sort records with the oldest or newest inspection date first.

7 Click Include previous readings if you want the report to include previous inspection readings.

8 If you want to include facilities in the report based on certain criteria, complete the following steps:

a To include active facilities, click Active Facilities.

b To include inactive facilities and facilities on inactive ROWs, click Inactive Facilities and Facilities on Inactive ROWs.

c To include facilities for a particular relative milepost range, type a beginning and ending relative milepost number in the Relative Milepost is between fields.

d Click Ad Hoc Filter to filter facilities based on user-defined settings. Click the down arrow and select a data type in the drop-down list. Click the down arrow in the adjacent field and select a condition in the drop-down list.

9 Click the Layout tab.

10 Select which fields to include in the report. Double-click to open a field category in Available Fields, such as All Fields. Double-click a field to move it to Selected Fields. The report includes all fields listed in Selected Fields.

NOTE: If you want to remove a field from the report, double-click the field in Selected Fields to move it back to Available Fields.

11 Arrange fields in the report. Report fields are arranged in the same order as those listed in Selected Fields. To move a field to a different position in the list and subsequently the report, click and drag a field button to a different position.

128 Routes

Page 137: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

12 Click Paper Settings and Print Options.

13 Set up Paper Settings such as Size, Orientation, Fonts & Sizes, Column Spacing, and so on. When choosing options, view Width Remaining and Report Paper Size Estimate to determine if you need to adjust settings.

14 Set up Print Options such as Insert Lines Between Groups, Page Breaks, Reprint group headings on each page, and so on.

15 Click the favorites icon in the bottom right hand corner of the window if you want to add the report to your favorites (Reports/Graphs > My Favorite Reports).

16 Print a copy of the report. Click Print or click Preview > File > Print.

Print a Route Definition or Unrouted Facilities ReportComplete the following steps to print a report that identifies which facilities are included or excluded in a route:

1 Click Select ROWs to open the Select ROWs window. Select one or more pipeline segments with facilities you want to work with and then click Close.

2 Click Data Entry > Define Routes.

3 Click the down arrow in Survey Routes and select a route in the drop-down list.

4 Complete one of the following steps:

a Click Print Route to print a report that identifies facilities included in the route.

-or-

b Click Print Unrouted to print a report that identifies facilities not included in the route.

5 When the Print Options window opens, complete the following steps:

a Click the arrow in the Paper Size field and select a paper size in the drop-down list.

b If you want to change the report font or font size, click the arrow in the Font & Size field and select a font in the drop-down list. Click the up/down arrows in the adjacent field to select a different font size.

c Click Portrait or Landscape in Orientation to print the report in portrait or landscape mode.

Routes 129

Page 138: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

d If you want to change the left paper margin, click the up/down arrows in Left Margin to select a different setting.

e Click Print.

6 When a preview of the report displays, click File > Print to print the report.

Import or Export a RouteComplete the following steps to import or export a route:

1 Click Select ROWs to open the Select ROWs window. Select one or more pipeline segments with facilities you want to work with and then click Close.

2 Click Data Entry > Define Routes.

3 Click the down arrow in Survey Routes and select a route in the drop-down list.

4 To import a route, click Import and then complete the following steps:

a Click Yes when the following message displays: Importing will overwrite your currently selected route. Continue?

b When the File Import window opens, click the down arrow in File Type and select the type of file you want to import.

c Click the ellipsis button (...) in the File Name field. When the Open window displays, navigate to the folder that contains the file you want to import. Select the file and then click OK.

d Click OK in the File Import window. When the message Route import completed displays, click OK to close the message.

5 To export a route, click Export and then complete the following steps:

a Click Yes when the Save Changes message displays.

b When the File Export window opens, click the down arrow in File Type and select a file type in the drop-down list.

c Click the ellipsis button (...) in the File Name field. Open the folder where you want to save the file and then click Save.

d Click OK in the File Import window. When the message Route import completed displays, click OK to close the message.

130 Routes

Page 139: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Build a Route for Allegro Timed ReadingsBuilding a route in PCS for Allegro timed readings includes tasks described in the following sections:

• Enable Timed Reading Fields in Field and UDF Customizations (page 131).

• Add Timed Reading Fields in the Grid (page 132).

• Define a New Route for a Timed Readings Survey (page 134).

• Set Up Customize Prompts and Sorting (page 134).

• Transfer the Route to the Allegro (page 136).

Enable Timed Reading Fields in Field and UDF Customizations

Complete the following steps:

1 Click Tools > Data Utilities > Field and UDF Customizations.

2 Click the open icon (+) in the navigation tree for Facility Surveys, CPDM, and then Test Points (Figure 5-1).

3 Click Test Point Information to view fields associated with the Test Point Information grid. Browse to the column labeled System Hide Column.

Routes 131

Page 140: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Figure 5-1. System Hide Column in Field and UDF Customizations

4 Verify the following timed reading fields are set up with the No option in System Hide Column. If Yes displays for any of these fields, double-click the setting to change it to No.

• Record Average P/S (Volts)

• Record Max P/S (Volts)

• Record Min P/S (Volts)

• Record P/S Sample Time (Min)

5 Click Test Point Inspections in the navigation tree to view fields associated with the Test Point Inspections grid. Browse to the column labeled System Hide Column.

6 Verify the following timed readings fields are setup with the No option in System Hide Column. If Yes displays, double-click the setting to change it to No.

132 Routes

Page 141: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

• Average P/S

• Max P/S

• Min P/S

• P/S Sample Time

7 Click Close to close the Field and UDF Customizations window.

Add Timed Reading Fields in the GridComplete the following steps to add fields in the Test Points Information and Inspections grid:

1 Click Select ROWs to open the Select ROWs window. Select one or more pipeline segments with facilities you want to work with and then click Close.

2 Click Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility.

3 Click the Information tab to display the Information grid. Click View > Data View to open the Data View window and then click the Layout tab.

4 Add the following list of timed reading fields in the Information grid. Click Close when you finish to close the Data View window.

Add a field by double-clicking the field in the left pane of the Data View window. To remove a field, double-click the field in the right pane to move it back to the left pane. All fields in the right pane are included in the grid.

• Record Average P/S (Volts)

• Record Max P/S (Volts)

• Record Min P/S (Volts)

• Record P/S Sample Time (Min)

5 In the Information grid for each of the timed reading Record columns, click the check box associated with each facility you want to record timed readings.

6 Click the Inspections tab to display the Inspections grid. Click View > Data View to open the Data View window and then click the Layout tab.

7 Add the following list of timed reading fields in the Inspections grid:

Routes 133

Page 142: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

• Average P/S

• Max P/S

• Min P/S

• P/S Sample Time (Min)

8 Click Close to close the Data View window. Click Close again to close the Edit Data by Facility window.

Define a New Route for a Timed Readings SurveyComplete the following steps:

1 Click Data Entry > Define Routes > New to open the New Route window.

2 Type a name for the new route and then click OK. The name of the new route displays in the Survey Routes drop-down list

3 Click the toggle arrow in Available Facilities: Sorting and Filtering to view facility types and filter options available for selection.

4 Select which facility types you want to work with in Available Facilities: Sorting and Filtering. Click Show active facilities only if you want PCS to display only active facilities. A list of facilities display in Available Facilities.

5 Choose how you want PCS to sort facilities listed in Available Facilities. Select a Sort By option, such as Address, Milepost Only, or Facility ID.

6 If you want PCS to display linked test points with rectifiers in Available Facilities, click Automatically include test points when adding rectifiers.

7 If any facility listed in Available Facilities is part of a Survey Group, and you want to view all facilities assigned to the Survey Group, click Automatically include all facilities in a Survey Group.

8 Click the check box in the Include column of Available Facilities for each facility you want to include in the new route. PCS displays facilities currently included in the new route in Facilities in this Route.

9 To change the survey order of facilities listed in Facilities in this Route, click and drag a facility’s move button to move the facility to a different position in the list.

10 Click Save.

134 Routes

Page 143: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Set Up Customize Prompts and SortingComplete the following steps to set up Customize Prompts and Sorting with timed reading fields:

1 Click Field Computer > Send Survey/Route > Customize Prompts and Sorting.

2 Click New to create a new Allegro Prompts Theme or click the down arrow in Allegro Prompt Themes and select an existing theme in the drop-down list.

3 Click the down arrow in Facility Type and select a facility type in the drop-down list, such as Test Point.

4 Complete the following steps in Facility, Information and ROW Fields to add information fields in the file that transfers to the Allegro:

a Click a category to view a list of fields available for selection. For example, click Test Point Facility Fields.

b Double-click an information field to move it to the right pane. Repeat this step for each additional field as required. The right pane lists all fields that will be included in the file that transfers to the Allegro.

5 Complete the following steps in Inspection and Maintenance Fields to add timed reading fields in the survey file that transfers to the Allegro:

a Click Test Point Inspection Fields to view a list of fields available for selection.

b Double-click each of the following timed reading fields to move fields to the right pane. Fields in the right pane are included in the file that transfers to the Allegro.

• Average P/S (Volts)

• Max P/S (Volts)

• Min P/S (Volts)

• P/S Sample Time (Min)

6 Complete the following steps to add Site String fields. These fields help identify one facility from another. They are included with each facility and can be viewed in the Site List window on the Allegro.

a Click the toggle arrow in Site String to expand the window.

Routes 135

Page 144: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

b Click to open a category listed in the left pane of the window to view fields available for selection. For example, click All Fields, ROW Permanent Information Fields, or Facility Fields.

c Double-click a field to move it to the right pane of the window. Repeat this step for each field you want to include in the Site List. For example, double-click Facility ID and Location Description. Fields in the right pane are included in the Site List.

7 If required, repeat steps 3 through 7 to set up prompts for another facility type.

8 Click Save to save settings and then click Close to close the Customize Prompts and Sorting window.

Transfer the Route to the AllegroComplete the following steps:

1 Click Field Computer > Send Survey/Route > Send Survey/Route.

2 Click Routes in Send Based On to display a list of routes. Select a route and then click Refresh Facilities List.

3 Click the arrow in Select Prompts and select a prompts theme in the drop-down list.

4 Click the arrow in Select Sorting Method and select a sorting method theme in the drop-down list.

5 Type a name for the output file in the Output File field making sure to include the .dat file extension.

6 Click the option Send to Allegro.

7 If you want to include only certain facilities in the output file based on particular criteria, click the toggle arrow in Optional Filters and then complete the following steps. An updated list of facilities display in Facilities in Selected Routes.

a To include facilities for a particular milepost range, type a beginning and ending milepost number in the Milepost is between fields.

b Click Ad Hoc to filter facilities based on user-defined settings. Click the down arrow and select a data type in the drop-down list. Click the down arrow in the adjacent field and select a condition in the drop-down list.

8 Click Send to transfer the file to the Allegro. When the message Send process completed displays, click OK.

136 Routes

Page 145: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

NOTE: PCS transfers the output file to the PsData folder on the Allegro.

Build a Route for Allegro Inspection GPS ReadingsBuilding a route to include prompts for inspection GPS fields allows the Allegro Periodic Survey (PS) software to capture survey readings with GPS location data. This feature allows the field technician to verify survey readings are taken at the correct location.

Prompts for inspection GPS fields appear in the readings pane of the PS survey file. When the Allegro captures survey readings with inspection GPS data, GPS data in the information pane of the survey file is not overwritten. The survey file maintains facility GPS location data in the information pane and survey readings with inspection GPS data in the readings pane.

Building a route in PCS for Allegro inspection GPS readings includes tasks described in the following sections:

• Enable Inspection GPS Fields in Field & UDF Customizations (page 137)

• Add Inspection GPS fields in a Grid (page 139)

• Define a New Route (page 140)

• Set Up Customize Prompts and Sorting (page 142)

• Transfer a Route to the Allegro (page 144)

Enable Inspection GPS Fields in Field & UDF CustomizationsComplete the following steps to verify inspection GPS fields are enabled in Field and UDF Customizations:

1 Click Tools > Data Utilities > Field and UDF Customizations.

2 Click the open icon (+) in the navigation tree for Facility Surveys and then Common to All Facilities (Figure 5-2, page 138).

3 Click Inspections to view fields associated with all PCS Inspections grid. Browse to the column labeled System Hide Column.

Routes 137

Page 146: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Figure 5-2. System Hide Column in Field and UDF Customizations

4 Verify the following inspection GPS fields are set up with the No option in System Hide Column. If Yes displays for any of these fields, double-click the setting to change it to No.

• Inspection Latitude

• Inspection Longitude

• Inspection Elevation

• Inspection GPS Accuracy

• Inspection GPS Difference

5 Click Close to close the Field and UDF Customizations window.

SystemHide

ColumnNavigation

Tree

138 Routes

Page 147: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Add Inspection GPS fields in a GridThe procedure in this section explains how to add inspection GPS fields in the Test Points Inspections grid. The procedure also applies to the Rectifiers, Foreign Bonds, Galvanic Anodes, and Tanks Inspections grid.

Complete the following steps:

1 Click Select ROWs to open the Select ROWs window. Select one or more pipeline segments with facilities you want to work with and then click Close.

2 Click Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility.

3 Click the Test Points tab and then the Inspections tab to display the Test Points Inspections grid.

4 Click View > Data View to open the Data View window and then click the Layout tab.

5 Add the following inspection GPS fields in the Inspections grid:

• Inspection Latitude

• Inspection Longitude

• Inspection Elevation

• Inspection GPS Accuracy

• Inspection GPS Difference

NOTE: Inspection GPS Difference is a PCS calculated field that shows the difference between an inspection GPS location and a facility GPS location. It is available for use in grids, reports, and Bridge.

6 Click Close to close the Data View window. Click Close again to close the Edit Data by Facility window.

Routes 139

Page 148: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Define a New RouteThe following procedure uses test points as an example; it also applies to rectifiers, foreign bonds, galvanic anodes, or tanks.

Complete the following steps:

1 Click Data Entry > Define Routes > New to open the New Route window (Figure 5-3).

2 Type a name for the new route and then click OK. The name of the new route displays in the Survey Routes drop-down list of the Define Routes window (Figure 5-4).

Figure 5-3. New Route

3 Click the toggle arrow in Available Facilities: Sorting and Filtering to view facility types and filter options available for selection.

Figure 5-4. Define Routes

140 Routes

Page 149: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

4 Select which facility types you want to work with in Available Facilities: Sorting and Filtering. Click Show active facilities only if you want PCS to display only active facilities. A list of facilities display in Available Facilities.

5 Choose how you want PCS to sort facilities listed in Available Facilities. Select a Sort By option, such as Address, Milepost Only, or Facility ID.

6 If you want PCS to display linked test points with rectifiers in Available Facilities, click Automatically include test points when adding rectifiers.

7 If any facility listed in Available Facilities is part of a Survey Group, and you want to view all facilities assigned to the Survey Group, click Automatically include all facilities in a Survey Group.

8 Click the check box in the Include column of Available Facilities for each facility you want to include in the new route. PCS displays facilities currently included in the new route in Facilities in this Route (Figure 5-5).

9 To change the survey order of facilities listed in Facilities in this Route, click and drag a facility’s move button to move the facility to a different position in the list.

10 Click Save.

The new route is now completed. Continue with the next section to setup Allegro prompts and sorting.

Figure 5-5. Facilities in this Route

Routes 141

Page 150: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Set Up Customize Prompts and SortingComplete the following steps to set up Customize Prompts and Sorting to include inspection GPS fields:

1 Click Field Computer > Send Survey/Route > Customize Prompts and Sorting.

2 Click New to create a new Allegro Prompts Theme or click the down arrow in Allegro Prompt Themes and select an existing theme in the drop-down list (Figure 5-6, page 143).

3 Click the down arrow in Facility Type and select a facility type in the drop-down list, such as Test Point.

4 Complete the following steps in Facility, Information and ROW Fields to add information fields in the file that transfers to the Allegro:

a Click a category to view a list of fields available for selection. For example, click Test Point Facility Fields.

b Double-click an information field to move it to the right pane. Repeat this step for each additional field as required. The right pane lists all fields that will be included in the file that transfers to the Allegro.

5 Complete the following steps in Inspection and Maintenance Fields to add inspection GPS reading fields:

a Click Test Point Inspection Fields to view a list of fields available for selection.

b Double-click each of the following fields to move fields to the right pane. Fields in the right pane are included in the file that transfers to the Allegro.

• Inspection Latitude

• Inspection Longitude

• Inspection Elevation

• Inspection GPS Accuracy

142 Routes

Page 151: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

6 Complete the following steps to add Site String fields. These fields help identify one facility from another. They are included with each facility and can be viewed in the Allegro Site List window.

a Click the toggle arrow in Site String to expand the window.

b Click to open a category listed in the left pane of the window to view fields available for selection. For example, click All Fields, ROW Permanent Information Fields, or Facility Fields.

c Double-click a field to move it to the right pane of the window. Repeat this step for each field you want to include in the Site List. For example, double-click Facility ID and Location Description. Fields in the right pane are included in the Site List.

7 If required, repeat steps 3 through 7 to set up prompts for another facility type.

8 Click Save to save settings and then click Close to close the Customize Prompts and Sorting window.

Figure 5-6. Customize Prompts and Sorting

Routes 143

Page 152: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Transfer a Route to the AllegroComplete the following steps:

1 Click Field Computer > Send Survey/Route > Send Survey/Route.

2 Click Routes in Send Based On to display a list of routes. Select a route and then click Refresh Facilities List.

3 Click the arrow in Select Prompts and select a prompts theme in the drop-down list.

4 Click the arrow in Select Sorting Method and select a sorting method theme in the drop-down list.

5 Type a name for the output file in the Output File field making sure to include the .dat file extension.

6 Click the option Send to Allegro.

7 If you want to include only certain facilities in the output file based on particular criteria, click the toggle arrow in Optional Filters and then complete the following steps. An updated list of facilities display in Facilities in Selected Routes.

a To include facilities for a particular milepost range, type a beginning and ending milepost number in the Milepost is between fields.

b Click Ad Hoc to filter facilities based on user-defined settings. Click the down arrow and select a data type in the drop-down list. Click the down arrow in the adjacent field and select a condition in the drop-down list.

8 Click Send to transfer the file to the Allegro. When the message Send process completed displays, click OK.

NOTE: PCS transfers the output file to the PsData folder on the Allegro.

144 Routes

Page 153: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Notes

Routes 145

Page 154: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

146 Routes

Page 155: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

6

Bridge

Bridge is an optional add-on feature that allows you to import and export data between PCS and an external system, such as a GIS (geographic information system) or work management system.

This chapter explains how to use Bridge to import and export data in PCS. Topics include those in the following list:

• Bridge System Settings

• Bridge Transition File Requirements (page 148)

• Using an External System ID in Bridge (page 149)

• Setting Up Import and Export Definition Files (page 150)

• Running Bridge (page 162)

Bridge System SettingsInformation in this section applies to a PCS system running two-way synchronization. It explains how to set up System Settings so that PCS automatically runs Bridge when the master database is in server mode. The Bridge Import/Export file must also have the following option enabled, Two-way replication server bridges data each day.

Complete the following steps:

1 Click Tools > System Settings > Bridge tab.

2 Type the time of day to automatically export data in the Setting column for Time of day at which Bridge export is run. Type the time using 24-hour format.

147

Page 156: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

3 Type the time of day to automatically import data in the Setting column for Time of day at which Bridge import is run. Type the time using 24-hour format.

4 Click the check box in Export Setting for each setting you want to include in a PCS export file (File > Export Data).

5 Click Close to close the System Settings window.

Bridge Transition File RequirementsBridge uses a transition file to import and export data in PCS. The import transition file is created by an external system and is in a format that both Bridge and the external system can read and write. File formats supported by Bridge include those in the following list:

• Excel Spreadsheet (.xlsx or .xls)

IMPORTANT: Select the .xlsx file format when creating an import transition file using Excel 2007 or later. For software versions prior to Excel 2007, select the .xls file format. PCS supports up to 100,000 rows of records when using the Excel .xlsx file format and up to 64,000 rows of records when using the Excel .xls file format.

• ASCII, comma-delimited (.csv or .txt)

• Database file (.dbf)

• XML file (.xml)

148 Bridge

Page 157: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Using an External System ID in BridgeBridge provides the option of associating an external system ID with any of the following PCS fields: user-defined field (UDF), Facility ID, or Facility.facid (facid). The external system ID is typically a unique identifier generated by the external system. The UDF is used in place of the fields labeled ROW Code and Milepost when creating an import or export definition file in Bridge Setup Wizard. The UDF allows PCS to map (or link) facilities between PCS and the external system.

The following example shows an import transition file with a UDF assigned to an external system ID (Figure 6-1). Positive readings convert to negative readings automatically during the import process.

Figure 6-1. Transition File with External System ID

To create a UDF for an external system ID1 Click Tools > Data Utilities > Field and UDF Customizations.

2 Open the Facility Surveys group and click Common to All Facilities > Permanent Information.

3 Click New to open the Add New UDF window and complete the following steps:

a Type a name for the UDF in the Caption field.

b Click the arrow in the Data Type field and select either Character or Numeric in the drop-down list. Verify the default setting Normal UDF is selected in the list of options.

Bridge 149

Page 158: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

c Click OK to save changes and then click Yes when the following message displays:

Warning! This is a major modification to the database and should only be performed by system administrators. Continue?

4 Click Close to exit the Field and UDF Customizations window.

Setting Up Import and Export Definition FilesInformation in this section explains how to set up Bridge import and export definition files using Bridge Setup Wizard. Topics include those in the following list:

• To set up an import definition file

• To set up an export definition file (page 154)

• To set up an import and export definition file (page 157)

To set up an import definition file1 Click Tools > Bridge.

2 If you previously used Bridge to create a definition file, click New to open Bridge Setup Wizard. Otherwise click Yes to open Bridge Setup Wizard when the following message displays:

You have no bridges defined. Would you like to create one now?

3 Type a name for the Bridge definition in the field Bridge Definition Name and then click Next.

4 Select Only Import to PCS in Data Transfer.

NOTE: The message 1 rule violation displays by default when setting up a definition file. Additional violation messages may display until facility fields are mapped between PCS and the external system. If a violation message displays after linking facility fields, click Check Rules to identify incorrect settings and then correct settings as needed.

150 Bridge

Page 159: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

5 If you are creating a Bridge definition file to run on the PCS master database and the master database is set up in System Settings to automatically import data, click to enable the option Two-way replication server bridges data each day. A check mark inside the check box indicates the option is enabled.

6 If you want PCS to rename the transition file when Bridge is run manually, enable the option Rename imported files when bridge is run manually.

7 If you want to preview data when running a Bridge import manually, click the option Show preview when bridge is run manually.

The first preview window displays data included in the transition file. This is referred to as a “raw data” preview. The second preview window displays data according to how it is processed in PCS. This is referred to as a “processed data” preview.

IMPORTANT: Using Bridge Preview with a large import when running Bridge can exceed system limits. In these cases a message displays stating the file is too large and changes to the database cannot be retracted. The message displays with large import files that include more than 150,000 rows of facility data or more than 750,000 rows of continuous data. These limits are also affected by available system resources (memory). Row limits are less if other memory intensive programs are running. Before running a large import file, first make a backup of the database. This allows you to restore the database to a state prior to running a large import if unexpected changes occur in the database.

8 Click Next and then complete the following steps to select a file type and destination folder for the transition file:

a Click the down arrow in field Transition File Format and select a file type in the selection list. If the transition file was created in Excel 2007 or later, select the .xlsx file type. If created in a software version prior to Excel 2007, select the .xls file type.

b Click the ellipsis button (…) in the field Transition File Path to open the dialog box Select Transition File Path. Navigate to folder containing the transition file, then double-click to select the folder. Click OK and then click Next.

IMPORTANT: The folder containing the transition file should contain no files other than the transition file.

Bridge 151

Page 160: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

9 Select data items to import in PCS. Click a category in the left pane of the window to view data items available for selection. Double-click to select a data item and move it to the right pane of the window. For example clicking the CPDM category displays related data items available for selection.

NOTE: The right pane lists all selected data items to be imported. To remove a data item, double-click the data item to move it back to the left pane of the window.

10 Click Next. Select a data item for mapping and then click Edit Mappings for Selected Item.

11 Complete the following steps to select an import transition file and set up import options:

a Click the ellipsis button (...) in the field Import File Name (To PCS) to display the Open window. Open the folder containing the transition file. Select the file and then click OK.

IMPORTANT: Names of column headings in the transition file cannot include spaces or special characters. Either of these will trigger a rule violation when running Bridge.

b Complete the following steps if the following options are available for selection. PCS automatically hides these options when they do not apply to the current import transition file.

• Click to enable the option Assign inspections to an Annual Survey if you want inspection readings automatically assigned to an annual survey folder based on inspection dates in the import transition file.

• Click to enable the option Assign inspections to a Periodic Survey if you want inspection readings automatically assigned to a periodic survey folder based on inspection dates in the import transition file.

• Click to enable the option Match to existing inspections/maintenance on date only if you want to match data using only the date and not the time in the field Inspection Date and Time. This option only applies when importing inspection, maintenance, and sub-grid inspection data such as negatives.

152 Bridge

Page 161: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

• Click to enable the option Perform Range Checking if you want the Bridge Error Log to list imported values that are outside established range values. When this option is disabled, the Bridge import process does not verify whether imported values are out of range.

NOTE: A check mark inside the check box indicates the option is enabled. To disable the option, click the check box to clear the check mark.

• Click to enable the option Perform Criteria Checking if you want the Bridge Error Log to list imported values that are below protection criteria. When this option is disabled, the Bridge import process does not verify whether imported values are below protection criteria.

c Click Next.

12 Select fields to be imported. The left pane of the window displays a list of fields in the transition file that are available for selection. Double-click to select and move a field to the right pane. Clicking the bottom directional button selects and moves all fields.

All fields in the right pane are selected for importing. To remove a field, double-click the field to move it back to the left pane of the window.

13 Click Next and then complete the following steps to map PCS fields to fields in the transition file:

a Click to open Bridge Required Fields in the left pane of the window.

b To map required PCS fields to appropriate import fields:

• Select an import field listed in the Transition Field column.

• Double-click a required PCS field in the left pane of Bridge Required Fields to complete the mapping. Bridge displays field mappings in the grid columns labeled PCS Field and Transition Field.

c Map remaining PCS and import fields.

d If you want to apply a voltage conversion filter to an inspection field (such as Structure P/S), click the Import Voltage Conversion field and select a filter in the drop-down list.

14 Click Next two times and then click Finish to complete Bridge setup.

Bridge 153

Page 162: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

To set up an export definition file1 Click Tools > Bridge.

2 If you previously used Bridge to set up a definition file, click New to open Bridge Setup Wizard. Otherwise click Yes to open Bridge Setup Wizard when the following message displays:

You have no bridges defined. Would you like to create one now?

3 Type a name for the Bridge definition in the field Bridge Definition Name and then click Next.

4 Select Only Export from PCS in Data Transfer.

NOTE: The message 1 rule violation displays by default when setting up a definition file. Additional violation messages may display until facility fields are mapped between PCS and the external system. If a violation message displays after linking facility fields, click Check Rules to identify incorrect settings and then correct settings as needed.

5 If you are creating a Bridge definition file to run on the PCS master database, and the master database is set up in System Settings to automatically export data, click to enable the option Two-way replication server bridges data each day. A check mark inside the check box indicates the option is enabled.

6 Select an export option in Export Mode.

7 If you want to set up filter conditions that apply to all data items included in the Bridge definition file, complete the following steps:

a Click Edit Filters.

b Click New Filter if data item records should match all filter conditions. Click New “OR” Group if data item records should match any filter condition.

c Click the down arrow and select a record type in the drop-down list. Click the down arrow in the adjacent field and select a filter condition in the drop-down list.

d Type a name for the filter in the Filter Caption field.

e Type a name for filtered records in the Filter Header Caption field.

154 Bridge

Page 163: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

f Enable the option Filter is Always On if you want Bridge to automatically include the filter when exporting data. If the filter is disabled, you have the option to include the filter later when running the Bridge definition file.

g Click Apply.

8 Click Next and then complete the following steps to select a file type and destination folder for the transition file:

a Click the arrow in the field Transition File Format and select a file type in the drop-down list. If you plan to use the transition file with Excel 2007 or later, select the .xlsx file type. For software versions prior to Excel 2007, select the .xls file type instead.

b Click the ellipsis button (…) in the field Transition File Path to open the Select Transition File Path window. Select a destination folder for the transition file. Click OK and then click Next.

9 Select data items to export from PCS. Click a category in the left pane of the window to view data items available for selection. Double-click to select a data item and move it to the right pane of the window. For example clicking the CPDM category displays related data items available for selection.

NOTE: The right pane lists all selected data items to be exported. To remove a data item, double-click the data item to move it back to the left pane of the window.

10 Click Next. Select a data item for mapping and then click Edit Mappings for Selected Item.

11 Type a name for the transition file in the field Export File Name (From PCS).

12 If you want to set up filter conditions that apply only to the selected data item, complete the following steps:

a Click Edit Filters.

b Click New Filter if data item records should match all filter conditions. Click New “OR” Group if data item records should match any filter condition.

c Click the down arrow and select a record type in the drop-down list. Click the down arrow in the adjacent field and select a filter condition in the drop-down list.

d Type a name for the filter in the Filter Caption field.

e Type a name for filtered records in the Filter Header Caption field.

Bridge 155

Page 164: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

f Enable the option Filter is Always On if you want Bridge to automatically include the filter when exporting data. If the filter is disabled, you have the option to include the filter later when running the Bridge export file.

g Click Apply.

13 Click Next and then complete the following steps to select and map PCS fields for exporting:

a Double-click a field category in the right pane of the window to view PCS fields available for selection. For example, click All Fields to view all available fields.

b Double-click to select and move a PCS field to the right pane. Repeat this step for each PCS field you want to include in the export transition file. Selected fields display in the PCS Field column of the right pane.

c Click Auto-Fill to have PCS automatically generate a field caption in the grid column labeled Transition Field for each PCS field to be exported. Click Yes and then click OK when the Auto-Fill Complete message displays.

d If you want to change the name of a field caption in the grid column Transition Field, highlight the field caption and enter a name.

IMPORTANT: When typing the name of a field caption, make sure not to include spaces or special characters in the name. Using either triggers a rule violation when running Bridge.

14 Click Next two times and then click Finish to complete Bridge setup.

156 Bridge

Page 165: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

To set up an import and export definition file1 Click Tools > Bridge.

2 If you previously used Bridge to set up a definition file, click New to open Bridge Setup Wizard. Otherwise click Yes to open Bridge Setup Wizard when the following message displays:

You have no bridges defined. Would you like to create one now?

3 Type a name for the Bridge definition in the field Bridge Definition Name and then click Next.

4 Click Both Import and Export in Data Transfer.

5 If you want to import data in PCS before exporting data, select Import data first (New data will be exported). Use this option when the import session creates new records or updates data you want to include in the export transition file.

NOTE: The message 1 rule violation displays by default when setting up a definition file. Additional violation messages may display until facility fields are mapped between PCS and the external system. If a violation message displays after linking facility fields, click Check Rules to identify incorrect settings and then correct settings as needed.

6 If you are creating a Bridge definition file to run on the PCS master database, and the master database is set up in System Settings to automatically export data, click to enable the option Two-way replication server bridges data each day. A check mark inside the check box indicates the option is enabled.

7 If you want PCS to rename the import transition file when Bridge is run manually, enable the option Rename imported files when bridge is run manually.

Bridge 157

Page 166: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

8 If you want to preview data when running a Bridge import manually, click the option Show preview when bridge is run manually.

The first preview window displays data included in the import transition file. This is sometimes referred to as a “raw data” preview. The second preview window displays data according to how it is processed in PCS. This is sometimes referred to as a “processed data” preview.

IMPORTANT: Using Bridge Preview with a large import when running Bridge can exceed system limits. In these cases a message displays stating the file is too large and changes to the database cannot be retracted. The message displays with large import files that include more than 150,000 rows of facility data or more than 750,000 rows of continuous data. These limits are also affected by available system resources (memory). Row limits are less if other memory intensive programs are running. Before running a large import file, first make a backup of the database. This allows you to restore the database to a state prior to running a large import if unexpected changes occur in the database.

9 Select an export option in Export Mode.

10 If you want to set up filter conditions that apply to all data items in the export transition file, complete the following steps:

a Click Edit Filters.

b Click New Filter if data item records should match all filter conditions. Click New “OR” Group if data item records should match any filter condition.

c Click the down arrow and select a record type in the drop-down list. Click the down arrow in the adjacent field and select a filter condition in the drop-down list.

d Type a name for the filter in the Filter Caption field.

e Type a name for filtered records in the Filter Header Caption field.

f Enable the option Filter is Always On if you want Bridge to automatically include the filter when exporting data. If the filter is disabled, you have the option to include the filter later when running the Bridge export file.

g Click Apply.

158 Bridge

Page 167: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

11 Click Next and then complete the following steps to select a file type and destination folder for the import and export files:

a Click the arrow in the field Transition File Format and select a file type in the drop-down list. If you plan to use the transition file with Excel 2007 or later, select the .xlsx file type. For software versions prior to Excel 2007, select the .xls file type.

b Click the ellipsis button (…) in the field Transition File Path to open the Select Transition File Path window. Select a destination folder and then click OK. Click Next to continue.

12 Select data items to export from PCS. Click a category in the left pane of the window (such as CPDM) to view data items available for selection. Double-click to select a data item and move it to the right pane of the window.

NOTE: The right pane lists all selected data items to be exported. To remove a data item, double-click the data item to move it back to the left pane of the window.

13 Click Next. Select a data item for mapping and then click Edit Mappings for Selected Item.

14 Type a name for the export transition file in the field Export File Name (From PCS).

15 Complete the following steps to select an import transition file and set up import options:

a Click the ellipsis button (...) in the Import File Name (To PCS) field to display the Open window. Open the folder containing the import transition file. Select the file and click OK.

b Complete the following steps if the following options are available for selection. PCS automatically hides these options when they do not apply to the current import transition file.

• Click to enable the option Assign inspections to an Annual Survey if you want inspection readings automatically assigned to an annual survey folder based on inspection dates in the import transition file.

• Click to enable the option Assign inspections to a Periodic Survey if you want inspection readings automatically assigned to a periodic survey folder based on inspection dates in the import transition file.

Bridge 159

Page 168: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

• Click to enable the option Match to existing inspections/maintenance on date only if you want to match data using only the date and not the time in the field Inspection Date and Time. This option only applies when importing inspection, maintenance, and sub-grid inspection data such as negatives.

• Click to enable the option Perform Range Checking if you want the Bridge Error Log to list imported values that are outside established range values. When this option is disabled, the Bridge import process does not verify whether imported values are out of range.

NOTE: A check mark inside the check box indicates the option is enabled. To disable the option, click the check box to clear the check mark.

• Click to enable the option Perform Criteria Checking if you want the Bridge Error Log to list imported values that are below protection criteria. When this option is disabled, the Bridge import process does not verify whether imported values are below protection criteria.

16 If you want to set up filter conditions that apply only to the selected data item, complete the following steps:

a Click Edit Filters.

b Click New Filter if records should match all filter conditions. Click New “OR” Group if records should match any filter condition.

c Click the down arrow and select a record type in the drop-down list. Click the down arrow in the adjacent field and select a filter condition in the drop-down list.

d Type a name for the filter in the Filter Caption field.

e Type a name for filtered records in the Filter Header Caption field.

f Enable the option Filter is Always On if you want Bridge to automatically include the filter when exporting data. If the filter is disabled, you have the option to include the filter later when running the Bridge export file.

g Click Apply and then click Next.

160 Bridge

Page 169: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

17 Select fields to be imported. The left pane of the window displays a list of fields in the import transition file that are available for selection. Double-click to select and move a field to the right pane. Clicking the bottom directional button selects and moves all fields.

All fields in the right pane are selected for importing. To remove a field, double-click the field to move it back to the left pane of the window.

18 Click Next and then complete the following steps to map PCS fields to import fields:

a Click to open Bridge Required Fields.

b To map required PCS fields to appropriate import fields:

• Select an import field listed in the Transition Field column.

• Double-click a required PCS field to complete the mapping. Bridge displays field mappings in the PCS Field and Transition Field columns.

c Map remaining PCS import fields.

d If you want to apply a voltage conversion filter to an inspection field (such as Structure P/S), click the Import Voltage Conversion field and then select a filter in the drop-down list.

19 Click Next two times and then click Finish to complete Bridge setup.

Bridge 161

Page 170: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Running BridgeThis section includes information for the following topics:

• To run a Bridge definition and view the log

• To print a Bridge definition

To run a Bridge definition and view the log1 Click Select ROWs to open the Select ROWs window. Select one or more pipeline

segments with facilities you want to work with and then click Close.

2 Click Tools > Bridge.

3 Click the arrow in the Bridge field and select a definition file in the drop-down list.

4 Click Run Bridge to import or export data based on the selected definition file.

5 If the Bridge import is set up with the Bridge option Show preview when bridge is run manually, the Bridge Preview window opens. Review data and then click Continue or Cancel as required.

The first preview window displays data included in the transition file. This is sometimes referred to as a “raw data” preview. The second preview window displays data according to how it is processed in PCS. This is sometimes referred to as a “processed data” preview. Use filter buttons to filter records in “processed data”. For example, clicking New Record or Duplicate displays only those records that are new or that are duplicate records in PCS.

IMPORTANT: Using Bridge Preview with a large import when running Bridge can exceed system limits. In these cases a message displays stating the file is too large and changes to the database cannot be retracted. The message displays with large import files that include more than 150,000 rows of facility data or more than 750,000 rows of continuous data. These limits are also affected by available system resources (memory). Row limits are less if other memory intensive programs are running. Before running a large import file, first make a backup of the database. This allows you to restore the database to a state prior to running a large import if unexpected changes occur in the database.

162 Bridge

Page 171: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

6 Click OK when the Bridge completed message displays.

7 Click View Log.

PCS records all Bridge sessions in the log with the most recent session at the top of the list. Each session includes a date and time stamp with a session Status label of Complete or Errors. Clicking a session in the list displays additional information in Session Log and Error Log that is helpful when identifying problems that may occur during a Bridge session.

To print a Bridge definition1 Click Tools > Bridge.

2 Click the arrow in the Bridge field and select a definition file in the drop-down list.

3 Click Print Bridge Definition.

4 When the Print Options window opens, complete the following steps:

a Click the arrow in the Paper Size field and select a paper size in the drop-down list.

b If you want to change the report font or font size, click the arrow in the Font & Size field and select a font in the drop-down list. Click the up/down arrows in the adjacent field to select a different font size.

c Click Portrait or Landscape in Orientation to print the report in portrait or landscape mode.

d If you want to change the left paper margin, click the up/down arrows in Left Margin to select a different setting.

e Click Print.

5 When a preview of the report displays, click File > Print to print the report.

Bridge 163

Page 172: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Notes

164 Bridge

Page 173: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

7

Field Computer

Information in this chapter explains how to use PCS with the Allegro Field Computer to send and receive survey files. Topics include those in the following list:

• Quick Start

• Working with Themes and Filter Groups (page 182)

• Viewing the Field Computer Log (page 191)

Quick StartThe procedures listed below explain how to use PCS with the Allegro to send and receive survey files. The process for sending a survey file to the Allegro requires selection of a prompt, layout, and sorting method theme. If themes have not previously been set up in PCS, begin with the section Working with Themes and Filter Groups (page 182) and then continue with any of the following procedures for sending a survey file to the Allegro.

Topics in this section include those in the following list:

• Sending a Facility Survey Based on Selected ROWs (page 166)

• Sending a Facility Survey Based on a Route (page 169)

• Sending a Facility Survey Based on a Schedule (page 171)

• Sending a Facility Survey Based on an Exported List (page 173)

• Sending a Facility Survey Based on Open Maintenance Items (page 175)

• Receiving a Facility Survey from the Allegro (page 178)

• Receiving a Continuous Survey from the Allegro (page 180)

165

Page 174: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Sending a Facility Survey Based on Selected ROWs The following procedure explains how to send a facility survey based on selected ROWs to the Allegro or a folder on your computer. The survey file includes facilities for inspection based on selected pipeline segments in the Select ROWs window.

Use the following procedure when you plan to take inspection readings using the Periodic Survey software on the Allegro or you plan to use the survey file with a third party software such as RouteSmart®.

Complete the following steps:

1 Verify the Allegro is connected to your computer if you plan to send the survey file to the Allegro. If needed, refer to the Allegro User Guide for information about how to connect the device.

2 Click the Select ROWs button to open the Select ROWs window (Figure 7-1). Click the check box for each pipeline segment with facilities you want to include in the survey file. Click Save to close the window.

Figure 7-1. Select ROWs

3 Click Field Computer > Send Survey/Route to open the Send Survey/Route window (Figure 7-2, page 167).

4 Click the option Selected ROWs in the Send Based On group box. Then choose a survey type in the selection box, such as Rectifier/Bond Survey.

166 Field Computer

Page 175: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

5 Select a prompt and sorting theme as follows:

a Click the down arrow in Select Prompts and select a prompt theme in the selection list.

b Click the down arrow in Select Sorting Method and select a sorting theme in the selection list.

Figure 7-2. Send Survey/Route

6 If you want to work with a subset of facility records that meet all filter conditions, set up one or more Ad Hoc filters using the following steps (Figure 7-3):

a Click the Optional Filters button to open the Optional Filters panel.

b Click the Ad Hoc Filter check box to display filter selection fields.

c Set up filter criteria. Select a PCS field, operator, and filter condition(s) using filter selection fields.

d If you want to set up an additional filter, click the Ad Hoc Filter check box to add another row of filter selection fields. Select a PCS field, operator, and filter condition(s) to set up filter criteria. Repeat this step as needed. When you finish, click the Optional Filters button to close the panel.

Field Computer 167

Page 176: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Figure 7-3. New Ad Hoc Filter

7 If you want to rename the survey file, type a name in the field Output File.

8 Choose a Send to option using one of the following methods:

a Select Send to Allegro if you plan to send the survey file to the Allegro.

b Select Send to Disk if you plan to send the survey file to a folder on your computer. Identify the folder location as follows:

• Click the ellipsis button … in the output directory field to open the Select Directory dialog box.

• Navigate to the folder and select it. Click Select to close the dialog box and return to the Send Survey/Route window.

9 Click Refresh Facilities List to update the grid.

10 Click Send. Based on your selection earlier, the survey file is sent either to the Allegro or a folder on your computer.

11 When a message displays confirming the send process is complete, click OK to close the message. If you selected to send the survey file to the Allegro, PCS sends the survey file to the PSData folder on the Allegro.

168 Field Computer

Page 177: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Sending a Facility Survey Based on a RouteThe procedure in this section explains how to send a facility survey based on a route to the Allegro or a folder on your computer. Use the following procedure when you plan to take inspection readings using the Periodic Survey software on the Allegro or you plan to use the survey file with a third party software such as RouteSmart®.

Complete the following steps:

1 Verify the Allegro is connected to your computer if you plan to send the survey file to the Allegro. If needed, refer to the Allegro User Guide for information about how to connect the device.

2 Select one or more pipeline segments in the Select ROWs window. Click Save to close the window (Figure 7-1, page 166).

3 Click Field Computer > Send Survey/Route to open the Send Survey/Route window.

4 Click the Routes option and then select a route in the selection box. The following figure shows My Route_2 has been selected (Figure 7-4).

Figure 7-4. Send Survey/Route

Field Computer 169

Page 178: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

5 Select a prompt and sorting theme as follows (Figure 7-4, page 169):

a Click the down arrow in Select Prompts and select a prompt theme in the selection list.

b Click the down arrow in Select Sorting Method and select a sorting theme in the selection list.

6 If you want to work with a subset of facility records that meet all filter conditions, set up one or more Ad Hoc filters using the following steps (Figure 7-4, page 169):

a Click the Optional Filters button to open the Optional Filters panel.

b Click the Ad Hoc Filter check box to display filter selection fields.

c Set up filter criteria. Select a PCS field, operator, and filter condition(s) using filter selection fields.

d If you want to set up an additional filter, click the Ad Hoc Filter check box to add another row of filter selection fields. Select a PCS field, operator, and filter condition(s) to set up filter criteria. Repeat this step as needed. When you finish, click the Optional Filters button to close the panel.

7 If you want to rename the survey file, type a name in the field Output File.

8 Choose a Send to option using one of the following methods:

a Select Send to Allegro if you plan to send the survey file to the Allegro.

b Select Send to Disk if you plan to send the survey file to a folder on your computer. Identify the folder location as follows:

• Click the ellipsis button … in the output directory field to open the Select Directory dialog box.

• Navigate to the folder and select it. Click Select to close the dialog box and return to the Send Survey/Route window.

9 Click Refresh Facilities List to update the grid.

10 Click Send. Based on your selection earlier, the survey file is sent either to the Allegro or a folder on your computer.

11 When a message displays confirming the send process is complete, click OK to close the message. If you selected to send the survey file to the Allegro, PCS sends the survey file to the PSData folder on the Allegro.

170 Field Computer

Page 179: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Sending a Facility Survey Based on a Schedule The procedure in this section explains how to send a facility survey based on a schedule to the Allegro or a folder on your computer. Use the following procedure when you plan to take inspection readings using the Periodic Survey software on the Allegro or you plan to use the survey file with a third party software such as RouteSmart®.

Complete the following steps:

1 Verify the Allegro is connected to your computer if you plan to send the survey file to the Allegro. If needed, refer to the Allegro User Guide for information about how to connect the device.

2 Select one or more pipeline segments in the Select ROWs window. Click Save to close the window (Figure 7-1, page 166).

3 Click Field Computer > Send Survey/Route to open the Send Survey/Route window.

4 Click the Schedule option and then select a schedule in the selection box.

5 Type a schedule date range in the Start Date and End Date fields. Then click Generate to generate the schedule. When the Generate Schedule message displays, click Yes (Figure 7-5).

Figure 7-5. Send Survey/Route

Field Computer 171

Page 180: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

6 Select a prompt and sorting theme as follows (Figure 7-4, page 169):

a Click the down arrow in Select Prompts and select a prompt theme in the selection list.

b Click the down arrow in Select Sorting Method and select a sorting theme in the selection list.

7 If you want to work with a subset of facility records that meet all filter conditions, set up one or more Ad Hoc filters using the following steps (Figure 7-4, page 169):

a Click the Optional Filters button to open the Optional Filters panel.

b Click the Ad Hoc Filter check box to display filter selection fields.

c Set up filter criteria. Select a PCS field, operator, and filter condition(s) using filter selection fields.

d If you want to set up an additional filter, click the Ad Hoc Filter check box to add another row of filter selection fields. Select a PCS field, operator, and filter condition(s) to set up filter criteria. Repeat this step as needed. When you finish, click the Optional Filters button to close the panel.

8 If you want to rename the survey file, type a name in the field Output File.

9 Choose a Send to option using one of the following methods:

a Select Send to Allegro if you plan to send the survey file to the Allegro.

b Select Send to Disk if you plan to send the survey file to a folder on your computer. Identify the folder location as follows:

• Click the ellipsis button … in the output directory field to open the Select Directory dialog box.

• Navigate to the folder and select it. Click Select to close the dialog box and return to the Send Survey/Route window.

10 Click Refresh Facilities List to update the grid.

11 Click Send. Based on your selection earlier, the survey file is sent either to the Allegro or a folder on your computer.

12 When a message displays confirming the send process is complete, click OK to close the message. If you selected to send the survey file to the Allegro, PCS sends the survey file to the PSData folder on the Allegro.

172 Field Computer

Page 181: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Sending a Facility Survey Based on an Exported ListThe following information applies to a survey file that has previously been set up, sent to disk, and then altered by a third party software such as RouteSmart®. Use the procedure in this section to import the survey file in PCS and then send it to the Allegro.

Complete the following steps:

1 Verify the Allegro is connected to your computer if you plan to send the survey file to the Allegro. If needed, refer to the Allegro User Guide for information about how to connect the device.

2 Select one or more pipeline segments in the Select ROWs window. Click Save to close the window (Figure 7-1, page 166).

3 Click Field Computer > Send Survey/Route to open the Send Survey/Route window. Then click the Exported List option (Figure 7-6).

Figure 7-6. Send Survey/Route

4 Complete the following steps to open the file you want to import:

a Click the ellipsis button (…) in the Exported List field to open the File Import dialog box (Figure 7-7).

Field Computer 173

Page 182: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

b Click the down arrow in the File Type field and select a file type in the selection list.

c Click the ellipsis button (…) in the File Name field to display the Open dialog box. Locate and select the file you want to import in PCS.

d Click OK to close the dialog box and then click Load to load import data in the Send Survey/Route grid.

Figure 7-7. File Import

5 Select a prompt and sorting theme as follows (Figure 7-6, page 173):

a Click the down arrow in Select Prompts and select a prompt theme in the selection list.

b Click the down arrow in Select Sorting Method and select a sorting theme in the selection list.

6 If you want to work with a subset of facility records that meet all filter conditions, set up one or more Ad Hoc filters using the following steps (Figure 7-4, page 169):

a Click the Optional Filters button to open the Optional Filters panel.

b Click the Ad Hoc Filter check box to display filter selection fields.

c Set up filter criteria. Select a PCS field, operator, and filter condition(s) using filter selection fields.

d If you want to set up an additional filter, click the Ad Hoc Filter check box to add another row of filter selection fields. Select a PCS field, operator, and filter condition(s) to set up filter criteria. Repeat this step as needed. When you finish, click the Optional Filters button to close the panel.

174 Field Computer

Page 183: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

7 If you want to rename the survey file, type a name in the field Output File.

8 Choose a Send to option using one of the following methods:

a Select Send to Allegro if you plan to send the survey file to the Allegro.

b Select Send to Disk if you plan to send the survey file to a folder on your computer. Identify the folder location as follows:

• Click the ellipsis button … in the output directory field to open the Select Directory dialog box.

• Navigate to the folder and select it. Click Select to close the dialog box and return to the Send Survey/Route window.

9 Click Refresh Facilities List to update the grid.

10 Click Send. Based on your selection earlier, the survey file is sent either to the Allegro or a folder on your computer.

11 When a message displays confirming the send process is complete, click OK to close the message. If you selected to send the survey file to the Allegro, PCS sends the survey file to the PSData folder on the Allegro.

Sending a Facility Survey Based on Open Maintenance ItemsThe procedure in this section explains how to send a facility survey to the Allegro or a folder on your computer that is based on open maintenance items. Use the following procedure when you plan to take survey readings using the Periodic Survey software on the Allegro or you plan to use the survey file with a third party software such as RouteSmart®.

Complete the following steps:

1 Verify the Allegro is connected to your computer if you plan to send the survey file to the Allegro. If needed, refer to the Allegro User Guide for information about how to connect the device.

2 Click Field Computer > Send Survey/Route to open the Send Survey/Route window (Figure 7-8, page 176).

3 Click the option Open Maintenance Items in the Send Based On group box. Then choose a survey type in the selection box, such as P/S Survey.

Field Computer 175

Page 184: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

4 Select a prompt and sorting theme as follows:

a Click the down arrow in Select Prompts and select a prompt theme in the selection list.

b Click the down arrow in Select Sorting Method and select a sorting theme in the selection list.

Figure 7-8. Send Survey/Route

5 If you want to work with a subset of facility records that meet all filter conditions, set up one or more Ad Hoc filters using the following steps (Figure 7-9, page 177):

a Click the Optional Filters button to open the Optional Filters panel.

b Click the Ad Hoc Filter check box to display filter selection fields.

c Set up filter criteria. Select a PCS field, operator, and filter condition(s) using filter selection fields.

d If you want to set up an additional filter, click the Ad Hoc Filter check box to add another row of filter selection fields. Select a PCS field, operator, and filter condition(s) to set up filter criteria. Repeat this step as needed. When you finish, click the Optional Filters button to close the panel.

176 Field Computer

Page 185: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Figure 7-9. New Ad Hoc Filter

6 If you want to rename the survey file, type a name in the field Output File.

7 Choose a Send to option using one of the following methods:

a Select Send to Allegro if you plan to send the survey file to the Allegro.

b Select Send to Disk if you plan to send the survey file to a folder on your computer. Identify the folder location as follows:

• Click the ellipsis button … in the output directory field to open the Select Directory dialog box.

• Navigate to the folder and select it. Click Select to close the dialog box and return to the Send Survey/Route window.

8 Click Refresh Facilities List to update the grid.

9 Click Send. Based on your selection earlier, the survey file is sent either to the Allegro or a folder on your computer.

10 When a message displays confirming the send process is complete, click OK to close the message. If you selected to send the survey file to the Allegro, PCS sends the survey file to the PSData folder on the Allegro.

Field Computer 177

Page 186: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Receiving a Facility Survey from the AllegroComplete the following steps to receive an Allegro PS periodic survey file in PCS:

1 Verify the Allegro is connected to your computer. If needed, refer to the Allegro User Guide for information about how to connect the device.

2 Click Field Computer > Receive Data to open the Receive Allegro Data dialog box.

3 Click Receive Facility Data and then click the From Allegro option.

4 Click Retrieve File Listing to view a list of periodic survey files available for selection (Figure 7-10).

5 Select a survey file in the selection box and then click Receive.

To select multiple survey files, press and hold the CTRL key on your computer keyboard while selecting each survey file. To select multiple survey files in sequential order, press and hold the SHIFT key, select the first file and then select the last file.

Figure 7-10. Receive Allegro Data

6 Select one of the following options when the dialog box Options for Receiving Data opens (Figure 7-11, page 179):

a Select No Survey Assignments if you do not want to assign Allegro survey data to a survey folder.

178 Field Computer

Page 187: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

b Select Automatic Assignment and then select one of the following options to have PCS automatically assign Allegro survey data to a survey folder:

• Assign Survey: Select this option if you want PCS to automatically assign survey data to an annual or multi-year survey folder based on the inspection date of the Allegro survey data.

• Assign Periodic Survey and Year : Select this option if you want PCS to automatically assign survey data to a periodic survey folder based on the inspection date of the Allegro survey data.

c Select Manual Assignment and then select one of the following options to manually select a survey folder for assigning Allegro survey data:

• Survey: Select this option to choose an annual or multi-year survey folder for assigning Allegro survey data. Click the down arrow in the Survey field and select a survey in the selection list.

• Periodic Survey, Year : Select this option to choose a periodic survey folder and the survey year for assigning Allegro survey data. Click the down arrow in the Periodic Survey field and select a periodic survey folder in the selection list. Then click the down arrow in the Year field and select the survey year.

d Click Continue to apply the survey folder option to all selected survey files.

7 Click OK when the message Receive Allegro Data opens stating the transfer process is complete.

Figure 7-11. Options for Receiving Data

Field Computer 179

Page 188: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Receiving a Continuous Survey from the AllegroInformation in this section explains how to receive an Allegro CeCi close interval survey file in PCS.

IMPORTANT: For data to transfer properly, the name of the pipeline entered in the Segment field of the Allegro CeCi survey file must match the ROW Code in PCS. The survey name entered in the Run field of the CeCi survey file is used to create a survey folder in PCS (Data Entry > Survey Folder Maintenance). See the Allegro MX User Guide for more information about setting properties in a CeCi survey file.

Complete the following steps:

1 Verify the Allegro is connected to your computer. If needed, refer to the Allegro User Guide for information about how to connect the device.

2 Click Field Computer > Receive Data to open the Receive Allegro Data dialog box (Figure 7-12).

3 Click the option Receive CIS Data or the option Receive CIS Native Data if you plan to import a survey file with native data.

4 Click the option From Allegro.

Figure 7-12. Receive Allegro Data

180 Field Computer

Page 189: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

5 Click Retrieve File Listing to view a list of survey files available for selection (Figure 7-13).

6 Select a survey file in the selection box and then click Receive.

To select multiple survey files, press and hold the CTRL key on your computer keyboard while selecting each survey file. To select multiple survey files in sequential order, press and hold the SHIFT key, select the first file and then select the last file.

7 Click OK when the message Receive Allegro Data opens stating the transfer process is complete.

NOTE: The field Allegro Survey Information in the Edit ISM Data grid identifies survey data imported from the Allegro.

Figure 7-13. Receive Allegro Data

Field Computer 181

Page 190: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Working with Themes and Filter GroupsA theme is a group of named settings saved for later use, such as a grid layout or sort theme. Themes are either public or private. A public theme is available for use by all PCS users. A private theme is available only to the user who creates it.

Several installed themes are provided with the PCS software installation. PCS installed themes are public themes available to all PCS users. These themes are identified with PCS in brackets [PCS], such as [PCS] Allegro Survey.

A filter group is a named set of one or more filters that affect the data output in the grid of Send Survey/Route and subsequently the file sent to the Allegro. PCS provides two types of filter groups you can define. These include the AND and OR filter groups.

When you add a filter group, you define filter conditions that determine which records to include or exclude. Adding an AND filter group produces a subset of records that meet all filter conditions. Adding an OR filter group produces a subset of records that meet any filter condition. When you apply a filter group, PCS processes filters in descending order beginning with the filter at the top of the group.

The following sections describe how to add a prompt theme, sort theme, and one or more optional filter groups. Topics include those in the following list:

• Adding a Prompt Theme

• Adding a Sorting Theme (page 186)

• Adding an AND Filter Group (page 187)

• Adding an OR Filter Group (page 189)

Adding a Prompt ThemeA prompt theme is a named set of fields that provide information and prompt the user for survey data when performing a survey using the Allegro.

Adding a prompt theme allows you to choose which fields to include in the survey file sent to the Allegro. The same prompt theme can include multiple facility types, such as test points, rectifiers, bonds, valves, and so on. Each facility type can also include up to eight pages of prompts. For example, you can include up to 8 pages of inspection prompts for entering facility inspection and maintenance readings.

When viewing the survey file on the Allegro, prompts display in either the top or bottom frame of the window. Information prompts display in the top frame while inspection and maintenance prompts display in the bottom frame. See the Allegro User Guide for more information about working with a survey file on the Allegro.

182 Field Computer

Page 191: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

To add a prompt theme, follow these steps:

1 Select one or more pipeline segments in the Select ROWs window and then click Close.

2 Click Field Computer > Send Survey/Route > Customize Prompts and Sorting to open the Customize Prompts and Sorting window (Figure 7-14).

Figure 7-14. Prompts Theme

3 Click New to open the New Theme dialog box. Type a name for the theme and then click OK.

4 When a message displays asking if you want to copy prompts from another theme, click Yes or No.

5 When the Public or Private message opens asking if you want the new theme public, click Yes or No.

A public theme is available to all PCS users. Clicking No stores the theme as a private theme. A private theme is available only to the user that creates it.

Field Computer 183

Page 192: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

6 Verify the name of the new theme displays in the field Allegro Prompt Themes. If not, click the down arrow and select the theme in the selection list (Figure 7-15).

7 Click the down arrow in the Facility Type field and select a facility type in the selection list that you want to set up prompts.

8 To add information prompts, follow these steps:

a Double-click All Fields in Facility, Information and ROW Fields to view a list of fields available for selection.

b Double-click one or more fields in the selection list to move fields to the right pane. All fields listed in the right pane are included in the prompt theme.

9 To add inspection and maintenance prompts, follow these steps:

a Double-click All Fields in Inspection and Maintenance Field.

b Double-click one or more fields in the selection list to move fields to the right pane. All fields listed in the right pane are included in the prompt theme.

10 If you want to remove information, inspection, or maintenance prompts, double-click a field listed in the right pane to move it back to the left pane.

Figure 7-15. Prompts Theme

184 Field Computer

Page 193: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

11 Complete the following steps to add site string prompts that help identify one facility from another when using the Allegro. Site string prompts are included with each facility and can be viewed in the Allegro Site List window.

a Click the Site String tab to open the Site String panel (Figure 7-16).

b Double-click All Fields in the Site String panel to view a list of fields available for selection.

c Double-click one or more fields in the selection list to move fields to the right pane. All fields listed in the right pane are included in the prompt theme. When you finish, click the Site String tab to close the panel.

12 If you want to add another page of prompts, click a page number in the Pages field. Repeat steps 7 through 9 to set up information, inspection, and maintenance prompts for the same or another facility type. Click Save when you finish.

Figure 7-16. Site String

Field Computer 185

Page 194: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Adding a Sorting ThemeA sorting theme determines how PCS sorts grid records in the Send Route/Survey window. Adding a sorting theme allows you to choose which field(s) to sort data by and if data sorts alphanumerically in ascending or descending order.

To add a sorting theme, follow these steps:

1 Select one or more pipeline segments in the Select ROWs window and then click Close.

2 Click Field Computer > Send Survey/Route > Customize Prompts and Sorting to open the Customize Prompts and Sorting window (Figure 7-17).

3 Click the Sorting tab to open the sorting property sheet.

Figure 7-17. Sorting Theme

4 Click New to open the New Theme dialog box. Type a name for the theme and then click OK.

5 When the Public or Private message opens asking if you want the new theme public, click Yes or No.

A public theme is available to all PCS users. Clicking No stores the theme as a private theme. A private theme is available only to the user that creates it.

186 Field Computer

Page 195: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

6 Choose a mode for displaying records in the grid by selecting the option Selected ROWs Mode, Route Mode, or Schedule Mode.

7 Click the check box Utilize Survey Grouping with this theme if you want to include survey grouping. Survey grouping groups facilities by survey first and then by your selected sorting method, such as by ROW Code.

8 In the Sort data by group box, click Edit to open the sorting field panel. Choose a PCS field in the drop-down list and then select the option Ascending or Descending.

To remove a sorting field, click Edit to open the sorting field panel and then click Delete This Sort.

9 Click Save.

Adding an AND Filter GroupAn AND filter group is a named set of one or more filters that affect the data output in the grid of Send Survey/Route and subsequently the file sent to the Allegro. Adding an AND filter group produces a subset of records that meet all filter conditions. PCS processes filters in a filter group in descending order beginning with the filter at the top of the filter group.

To add an AND filter group, follow these steps:

1 Select one or more pipeline segments in the Select ROWs window and then click Close.

2 Click Field Computer > Send Survey/Route > Customize Prompts and Sorting to open the Customize Prompts and Sorting window (Figure 7-18, page 188).

3 Click the Filters tab to open the filter property sheet.

Field Computer 187

Page 196: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Figure 7-18. Filters Theme

4 Click New Filter to open a filter property group box.

5 Use filter selection fields to set up filter criteria. Select a PCS field, operator, and one or more filter conditions.

6 Type a name for the filter in the field Filter Caption. If you plan to group filters, type a name for the filter group in the field Filter Header Caption.

7 If you want the filter to remain on for all sessions of Send Survey/Route, select the check box Filter is Always On. When this check box is not selected, toggle the filter on and off in the Send Survey/Route window using the filter’s check box.

8 Click the close button (X) to close the filter properties group box. If you want to add another filter, repeat steps 4 through 7.

9 To move a filter to a different position in the filter group or a filter group to a different position in a group of filters:

a Click Edit for a filter to open the filter’s property settings. Click the up or down arrow to move the filter to a different position in the group of filters.

b Click the close button to close the filter properties group box.

PCS processes filters in a filter group in descending order beginning with the filter at the top of the filter group

10 Click Close to close the Customize Prompts and Sorting window.

188 Field Computer

Page 197: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Adding an OR Filter GroupAn OR filter group is a named set of one or more filters that affect the data output in the grid of Send Survey/Route and subsequently the file sent to the Allegro. Adding an OR filter group produces a subset of records that meet any filter condition. PCS processes filters in a filter group in descending order beginning with the filter at the top of the filter group.

To add an OR filter group, follow these steps:

1 Select one or more pipeline segments in the Select ROWs window and then click Close.

2 Click Field Computer > Send Survey/Route > Customize Prompts and Sorting to open the Customize Prompts and Sorting window.

3 Click the Filters tab and then click New “OR” Group to open a filter property group box (Figure 7-19, page 189).

Figure 7-19. Filters Theme

4 Use filter selection fields to set up filter criteria. Select a PCS field, operator, and one or more filter conditions.

5 Type a name for the filter in the field Filter Caption. If you plan to group filters, type a name for the filter group in the field Filter Header Caption.

Field Computer 189

Page 198: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

6 If you want the filter to remain on for all sessions of Send Survey/Route, select the check box Filter is Always On. When this check box is not selected, toggle the filter on and off in the Send Survey/Route window using the filter’s check box.

7 Click the close button (X) to close the filter properties group box. If you want to add another filter, repeat steps 3 through 6.

8 To move a filter to a different position in the filter group or a filter group to a different position in a group of filters:

a Click Edit for a filter to open the filter’s property settings. Click the up or down arrow to move the filter to a different position in the group of filters.

b Click the close button to close the filter properties group box.

PCS processes filters in a filter group in descending order beginning with the filter at the top of the filter group

9 Click Close to close the Customize Prompts and Sorting window.

190 Field Computer

Page 199: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Viewing the Field Computer LogThe field computer log includes a Send Log and Receive Log. The Send Log lists the facility records sent to the Allegro with the date and time records were processed. Likewise, the Receive Log identifies facility records received in PCS from the Allegro, as well as the date and time they were received. Only those facility records updated by the Allegro are processed and included in the Receive Log.

You can use information in the field computer log to:

• verify which facility records have been sent and received;

• compare both logs to verify all facilities that were inspected contain survey data;

• troubleshoot issues if a problem occurs during data transfer.

To view the field computer log:

1 Click Field Computer > Field Computer Log (Figure 7-20).

2 Click Send Log to view facility records sent to the Allegro. Click Receive Log to view facility records received in PCS from the Allegro.

Figure 7-20. Field Computer Log / Receive Log

Field Computer 191

Page 200: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Notes

192 Field Computer

Page 201: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

8

Bullhorn Interface

Bullhorn Interface is an optional add-on that allows you to import measurement readings in PCS from your account on the Bullhorn Asset Tracker (BAT) website. PCS imports measurement readings contained in an Extract report setup in BAT.

This chapter explains how to set up PCS to import readings in the Extract report. Topics include those in the following list:

• System Settings

• Matching PCS and BAT Fields (page 195)

• Importing a BAT Extract Report (page 197)

NOTE: For information about setting up the Extract report in BAT, refer to online help on the BAT website.

System SettingsTwo methods are available for importing the Extract report. The first method allows you to import the report directly from your company’s FTP (file transfer protocol) site or the Bullhorn FTP site. The second method imports the Extract report from a shared folder on your company’s network or from a folder on your computer. Both methods are described in this section.

Complete the following steps:

1 Click Tools > System Settings > Bullhorn tab.

2 Type your BAT website client ID in the Settings field labeled American Innovations customer ID Setting field.

193

Page 202: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

3 If you want measurement readings linked to a periodic survey based on the survey date, click the Settings check box for the field labeled Assign Bullhorn Inspections to a Periodic Survey based on the Survey Date.

4 If you plan to import the Extract report from a shared folder on your company’s network or your computer hard drive, click the option Bullhorn download from a disk drive and then complete one of the following steps:

a Type the network path of the shared network folder in the form of \\server name\share folder.

b Type the drive letter and folder path of the computer in the form of c:\folder name.

5 Complete the following steps if you plan to import the Extract report from your company’s FTP site or the Bullhorn FTP site.

If using your company’s FTP site, you may need to contact the company IT network administrator for FTP information needed in the following steps.

a Type your BAT website client ID in the Settings field labeled American Innovations customer ID Setting field.

b Type the FTP address in the Setting field labeled Bullhorn FTP site URL. Type the address in the form of ftp://ftp.servername.com.

c Type the name of the folder on the FTP server where the Extract report stores in the Setting field labeled Bullhorn FTP site folder.

d Type the password required to access files on the FTP server in the Setting field labeled Bullhorn FTP site password.

e Type the user name required to access files on the FTP server in the Setting field labeled Bullhorn FTP site username.

IMPORTANT: Ensure your company’s IT network administrator sets up the FTP server with “write” access privileges for the BAT website server. This allows the Extract report to transfer to a folder on the FTP server. The IT network administrator will also need to assign you “read/write” access privileges to the folder. This allows you to import Extract reports in PCS (read only function) and manage processed Extract reports, such as moving or deleting reports.

6 Click the check box in the Export Setting column for each setting you want to include in a PCS export file (File > Export Data).

194 Bullhorn Interface

Page 203: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Matching PCS and BAT FieldsFor the Extract report to correctly populate a PCS data grid, data entered in certain fields of PCS and BAT must match. Data is not case sensitive. See the next table for a list of PCS and BAT fields that must have matching field descriptions (Table 8-1).

Table 8-1. Matching PCS and BAT Fields

PCS Field BAT Field Description

Facility ID Serial Data entered in the Facility ID field of PCS must match data entered in the Serial field of BAT.

PCS: If the PCS grid does not include the Facility ID field for data entry, add the field using the Layout tab in the Data View window (View > Data View > Layout tab).

BAT: To access the Serial field in BAT, click Units > All Units and select a unit in the list. Click the Settings icon (pencil) in Unit Detail to view the description in the Serial field of the Info tab.

Bullhorn Engineering Unit

Engineering Unit Label

The PCS software installation automatically populates certain inspection fields in Field and UDF Customizations with a description for Bullhorn Engineering Unit (Tools > Data Utilities > Field and UDF Customizations).

This same description must be entered in BAT for the data point field labeled Engineering Unit Label (Data Point tab in Unit Admin). See Table 8-2 on the next page for a list of descriptions.

Bullhorn Interface 195

Page 204: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

The following table identifies PCS descriptions for Bullhorn Engineering Unit that are required when setting up Engineering Unit Label for a data point in BAT. The table also identifies the PCS facility type and inspection field associated with Bullhorn Engineering Unit (Tools > Data Utilities > Field and UDF Customizations).

Table 8-2. PCS Descriptions for Bullhorn Engineering Unit

Bullhorn Engineering Unit Description

Inspection Field Facility Type

CASING IOX Casing IRF Test Point

CASING Casing P/S Test Point

FOREIGN IOX Foreign IRF Test Point

FOREIGN Foreign P/S Test Point

INSUL IOX Insulator IRF Test Point

INSUL Insulator P/S Test Point

P/S IOX Structure IRF Test Point

P/S Structure P/S Test Point

AMP Rectifier Output Current Found

Rectifier

VOLT Rectifier Output Volts Found

Rectifier

NEG Negative Current Found Rectifier

BOND Bond Current Found Foreign Bond

PROBE RATE Probe Corr. Rate Probe

INJECTOR RATE Quantity Inhibitor Injector

196 Bullhorn Interface

Page 205: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Importing a BAT Extract ReportComplete the following steps to import an Extract report using Bullhorn Interface; view the Bullhorn Log; and view facility records with measurement readings imported from the BAT Extract report:

1 Click Tools > Bullhorn > Bullhorn Interface.

2 A progress indicator displays showing the status of the import (Figure 8-1). When the message Bullhorn download complete displays, click OK.

Figure 8-1. Bullhorn Interface Progress Indicator

3 Click Tools > Bullhorn > Bullhorn Log to open the Bullhorn Log window (Figure 8-2).

The log maintains a list of all Extract reports imported in PCS with the most recent at the top of the list. Each log record includes a date and time stamp and the total number of processed records. Click an entry in the list to view detailed information about inspection records imported in PCS.

Figure 8-2. Example of Bullhorn Log

Bullhorn Interface 197

Page 206: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

4 To view facility records with measurement readings imported from the Extract report:

a Click Select ROWs to open the Select ROWs window. Select one or more pipeline segments with facilities you want to work view and then click Close.

b Click Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility, Route, or Schedule.

c Click a facility tab, such as Test Points, and then click the Inspections tab.

d Verify Bullhorn Inspection displays in the Inspection Remarks field for one or more facilities included in the Extract report.

198 Bullhorn Interface

Page 207: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Notes

Bullhorn Interface 199

Page 208: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

200 Bullhorn Interface

Page 209: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

9

Reports and Graphs

Information in this chapter explains how to generate and use CPDM reports, graphs, and forms. Topics include those in the following list:

• CPDM Reports Overview

• Report Descriptions (page 203)

• Base and Custom Reports (page 211)

• Report Styles (page 212)

• Generating Reports (page 216)

• My Favorite Reports (page 218)

CPDM Reports OverviewCPDM reporting supports a variety of business applications. A few of these include managing data collection and data entry; reviewing the quality of CP data; providing information for an audit; and examining the effectiveness of a maintenance program. The following topics explain how CPDM reports can help in your business:

• Manage data collection and data entry (page 202)

• Review data quality (page 202)

• Provide information for an audit (page 202)

• Determine the effectiveness of a maintenance program (page 203)

201

Page 210: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Manage data collection and data entryProvide a printed copy of the CPDM Survey Report or CPDM Data Collection Report to technicians and vendors for recording cathodic protection (CP) data in the field. Update the PCS database using completed reports submitted by technicians and vendors. Using PCS reports in this manner allows you to verify consistent data collection and data entry in PCS.

Review data qualityUse CPDM reporting to check the quality of survey data submitted by vendors. The quickest method is to view the CPDM Survey Report to determine which facilities have not been surveyed. Blank fields in the report indicate no survey data. If a vendor is using the Allegro Field PC to collect survey data, view the field computer log to determine which facilities have not been surveyed.

Another method for checking the quality of survey data is to generate an Exceptions or Comparisons report. The Exceptions report allows you to compare surveys from previous years. Look for dramatic changes between surveys. You can also use the Exceptions report to check for data entry mistakes. This is helpful when range checking is not used in CPDM or when personnel enter data using survey data recorded in a printed form. The Comparisons report compares multiple years of survey data. Use the Comparisons report to review changes in data and check for mistakes that might have been made during data entry.

Provide information for an auditThe CPDM Survey Report and PCS Inspections Graph contain most of the information needed for an audit. When an audit requires more specific information, create a custom PCS, CPDM, or facility report using a columnar, summary, form, or graph report style.

To prepare for an audit, generate a PCS Delinquency Report to help with creating a plan for bringing a pipeline system into compliance. Another method for preparing for an audit is to generate a Data History Report using the Show Record Change History command on the View menu of a data entry grid. The Data History Report lists all data entry changes for facilities in a data grid. The CPDM Survey Report or any custom summary report can provide data for an audit. All other reports can provide supporting information for an audit.

202 Reports and Graphs

Page 211: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Determine the effectiveness of a maintenance programThe CPDM module provides several reports that help with determining the effectiveness of a maintenance program. For example, use the Rectifier Output History Report to review the output of a rectifier over time. Look for changes in the rectifier output and any survey remarks or permanent comments that identify reasons for the change. Another method for determining a maintenance program’s effectiveness is to generate the CPDM Survey Report and review the number of inspection readings for a particular survey period. Also look for changes among facilities.

Report DescriptionsCPDM provides four main report categories. They include PCS Reports, CPDM Reports, Facility Reports, and ROW Reports. Each of these categories include one or more base reports you can generate or customize using a columnar, summary, form, or graph report style. Information in the following table provides a description of each base report and also identifies available custom report styles (Table 9-1).

Table 9-1. CPDM Reports, Graphs, and Forms

Report Category Description Report Styles

PCS Reports PCS Delinquency Report is a compliance report that identifies delinquent facilities based on a regulatory survey schedule.

When the report is customized using the Summary report style, it is a statistical status report with a concise summary of the cathodic protection system. The report includes the number of delinquent facilities, missing and surveyed facilities, and facilities below criteria. As an option, the report also provides drilldown functionality for further analysis of delinquent facilities.

Base: columnar, form, and blank form

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

PCS Inspections Graph is a line graph report of survey data for facilities in a specific survey period. The report includes pipe-to-soil potentials, optional IRF, and native readings for the length of the pipeline and selected survey period.

Base and Custom: graph

Reports and Graphs 203

Page 212: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

PCS Schedule Report lists facilities that require inspection using the schedule definition selected for the report. The schedule definition and a calculation based on the last inspection date and target survey month determine which facilities the report includes. Information is presented in two formats; as a monthly calendar overview and as a detailed list of information.

Base: columnar and summary

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

CPDM Reports CPDM Survey Report includes all facility data in the survey period selected for the report.

Base: columnar and summary

Custom: columnar, summary, graph, form, and blank form

CPDM Data Collection Report is a blank, data collection report used by technicians and vendors to record survey readings in the field. Based on the type of survey selected in the report setup, the report includes a list of facilities and other optional data, such as previous survey readings.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Test Point Reports Test Point Information Report is a report based on information entered in the Test Points Information grid. Depending on how the report is set up, it can include information for user-selected fields, such as ROW name and code, milepost number, effective date, active/inactive status, protection criteria, and so on. The report does not include survey readings.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Table 9-1. CPDM Reports, Graphs, and Forms (continued)

Report Category Description Report Styles

204 Reports and Graphs

Page 213: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Test Point Inspections Report is a report based on information entered in the Test Points Inspection grid. It includes all survey data collected at a test point, excluding rectifiers and bonds.

Base: columnar, summary, graph, form, and blank form

Custom: columnar, summary, graph, form, and blank form

Test Point Maintenance Report is a report based on information entered in the Test Points Maintenance grid. It includes a detail listing of all current, pending, and completed repairs.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Test Point Exceptions Report includes survey data and other related information only for the facilities that meet certain criteria, such as structure readings less negative than –0.85 or more negative than –2.0. Criteria is defined by setting up the report with one or more report options; conditions that serve as exception filters; and field selections such as structure P/S, casing P/S, foreign P/S, survey, and so on.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Test Point Comparisons Report is a comparison list of all facility survey readings that meet certain criteria. Criteria is defined by selecting a Comparison Field, Comparison Type, Comparison Method, and an Amount (value or percent).

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Table 9-1. CPDM Reports, Graphs, and Forms (continued)

Report Category Description Report Styles

Reports and Graphs 205

Page 214: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Rectifier Reports Rectifier Information Report is a report based on information entered in the Rectifiers Information grid. Depending on how the report is set up, it can include information for user-selected fields such as rectifier history, milepost, facility ID, installation date, operational status (active/inactive), power company, serial number, manufacturer, and so on. The report does not include inspection readings.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Rectifier Inspections Report is a report based on information entered in the Rectifiers Inspection grid. Depending on the report setup, the report can include information for user-selected fields such as rectifier output volts found, tap settings, rectifier output current, inspection date and remarks; and so on. It includes all survey data collected at a test point, excluding rectifiers and bonds.

Base: columnar, summary, graph, form, and blank form

Custom: columnar, summary, graph, form, and blank form

Rectifier Maintenance Report is a report based on information entered in the Rectifiers Maintenance grid. It includes a detail listing of all current, pending, and completed repairs.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Rectifier Exceptions Report is a detailed list of rectifiers that do not meet user-defined criteria. Criteria is defined by selecting one or more report options and conditions that serve as exception filters. For example, when preparing for an audit, setup the report with conditions and report options that identify missing rectifier inspections or rectifiers that have not been inspected during a particular survey period.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Table 9-1. CPDM Reports, Graphs, and Forms (continued)

Report Category Description Report Styles

206 Reports and Graphs

Page 215: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Rectifier Comparisons Report is a comparison list of survey readings for rectifiers that meet specific user-defined criteria setup in the report. Criteria is defined by choosing a Comparison Field, Comparison Method and Type, and one or more report options and filters.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Current Density Analysis Report is a report that calculates the current density of a pipeline segment using rectifier output and bond current values for a user-selected survey.

Base: columnar

Custom: custom reports unavailable.

Current Density Summary Report is a summarized result of the current density calculation for multiple pipeline segments. The summarized result is based on a survey selection and one or more of the following fields selected during the report setup: Surface Area, Current Density, Current Demand, Average P/S, and Coating Quality.

Base: columnar

Custom: custom reports unavailable.

Foreign Bond Reports

Foreign Bond Information Report is a report based on information entered in the Foreign Bonds Information grid. Depending on how the report is set up, it includes information for user-selected fields such as critical bond, bond type, foreign company, milepost, facility, and so on.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Foreign Bond Inspections Report is a report based on information entered in the Foreign Bonds Inspection grid. Depending on how the report is set up, it includes information for user-selected fields, such as critical bond, bond current found, bond current adjusted, polarity, and so on.

Base: columnar and graph

Custom: columnar, summary, graph, form, and blank form

Table 9-1. CPDM Reports, Graphs, and Forms (continued)

Report Category Description Report Styles

Reports and Graphs 207

Page 216: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Foreign Bond Maintenance Report is a report based on information entered in the Foreign Bonds Maintenance grid. It includes a detail listing of all current, pending, and completed repairs.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Foreign Bond Exceptions Report is a detailed list of bonds that do not meet user-defined criteria. Criteria is defined by setting up the report with one or more conditions that serve as exception filters, report options, and field selections such as survey period, bond current found, bond current adjusted, bond current left, polarity, critical bond, and so on.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Foreign Bond Comparisons Report is a comparison list of survey readings for bonds that meet specific user-defined criteria setup in the report. Criteria is defined by choosing a Comparison Field, Comparison Method and Type, and one or more report options and filters.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Galvanic Anode Reports

Galvanic Anode Information Report is a report based on information entered in the Galvanic Anodes Information grid. Depending on how the report is set up, it includes information for user-selected fields such as pre-install P/S, anode initial current, anode type, soil resistivity, and so on.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Galvanic Anode Inspections Report is a report based on information entered in the Galvanic Anodes Inspections grid. Depending on how the report is set up, it includes information for user-selected fields, such as survey period, inspection date, anode and structure P/S reading, number of anodes and size, and so on.

Base: columnar and graph

Custom: columnar, summary, graph, form, and blank form

Table 9-1. CPDM Reports, Graphs, and Forms (continued)

Report Category Description Report Styles

208 Reports and Graphs

Page 217: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Galvanic Anode Maintenance Report is a report based on information entered in the Galvanic Anodes Maintenance grid. It includes a detail listing of all current, pending, and completed repairs.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Galvanic Anode Exceptions Report is a detailed list of galvanic anodes that do not meet user-defined criteria. Criteria is defined by setting up the report with one or more conditions that serve as exception filters, report options, and field selections such as inspection date, anode P/S, structure P/S, and so on.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Galvanic Anode Comparisons Report is a comparison list of survey readings for galvanic anode that meet specific user-defined criteria setup in the report. Criteria is defined by choosing a Comparison Field, Comparison Method and Type, and one or more report options and filters.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Tank Reports Tank Information Report is a report based on information entered in the Tank Information grid. Depending on how the report is setup, it includes information for user-selected fields such as: volume, cardinal points, structure readings for half-cell tank locations, tank protection criteria, and so on. Survey readings are not included.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Tank Inspections Report is a report based on information entered in the Tanks Inspections grid. Depending on how the report is set up, it includes information for user-selected fields, such as survey period, inspection date, structure P/S readings, and so on.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, graph, form, and blank form

Table 9-1. CPDM Reports, Graphs, and Forms (continued)

Report Category Description Report Styles

Reports and Graphs 209

Page 218: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Tank Maintenance Report is a report based on information entered in the Tanks Maintenance grid. It includes a detail listing of all current, pending, and completed repairs.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Tank Exceptions Report is a detailed list of tanks that do not meet user-defined criteria. Criteria is defined by setting up the report with one or more conditions that serve as exception filters, report options, and field selections such as inspection date, survey period, cardinal and subcardinal P/S fields, and so on.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Tank Comparisons Report is a comparison list of survey readings for tanks that meet specific user-defined criteria setup in the report. Criteria is defined by choosing a Comparison Field, Comparison Method and Type, and one or more report options and filters.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

ROW Reports ROW Information Report is a pipeline system report based on information entered in the Edit ROW Detail Information grid. Depending on how the report is set up, it includes information for user-selected fields such as pipeline name and size, total footage, default location format, surface area, and so on.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

ROW Maintenance Report is a pipeline system report based on information entered in the Edit ROW Detail Maintenance grid. It includes a detail listing of all current, pending, and completed repairs.

Base: columnar

Custom: columnar, summary, form, and blank form

Table 9-1. CPDM Reports, Graphs, and Forms (continued)

Report Category Description Report Styles

210 Reports and Graphs

Page 219: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Base and Custom ReportsBase reports are PCS default reports that use a private or public layout theme with default report settings.

A base report with a private layout theme includes the label [Private] in the report name. To change default settings, click New to create a new layout theme with user-defined settings for any base or custom report.

A base report with a public layout theme includes certain default settings that cannot be changed (Figure 9-1). This type of report includes the labels [PCS] and [Public] in the report name.

The following example shows the report setup window for a base report with a public layout theme selected (Figure 9-1). The report setup includes a list of default fields in the Selected Fields pane. These fields are unavailable for selection. Clicking New however allows you to create a new layout theme with report settings from the base report that can be modified.

Figure 9-1. Base Report with Public Layout Theme

Reports and Graphs 211

Page 220: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Report StylesAdditional report styles are available when customizing a PCS base report. The type of base report determines which report styles are available for customization. Report styles include columnar, summary, form, blank form, and graph. The following topics include a description for each of these report styles:

• Custom Columnar Report Style

• Custom Summary Report Style (page 213)

• Custom Form Report Style (page 214)

• Custom Graph Report Style (page 215)

Custom Columnar Report StyleA custom columnar report is similar to a spreadsheet (Figure 9-2). Data displays across the page in columns. Columns arrange vertically on the page and rows arrange horizontally. There are as many rows of data as there are records returned from the database. You can set up and save the report with a layout theme, sorting and grouping theme, report options, paper settings, and print options.

Figure 9-2. Example of a Custom Columnar Report Style

212 Reports and Graphs

Page 221: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Custom Summary Report StyleThe custom summary report displays data in a summary or spreadsheet format (Figure 9-3). The report includes fields that represent totals of other fields, or make reference to other fields in the report. The report presents calculated totals of averages, sums, counts, and percentages, while omitting the details used to arrive at those values.

As an option the report also provides interactive drilldown functionality for better data analysis. Using the drilldown features allows for multiple representations of data according to a flexible user-selected hierarchy. For example, dragging and dropping certain fields in the data area of the report produces a report in a cross-tab or pivot table format. You can set up and save the report with a layout theme, sorting and grouping theme, report options, and print and page size options.

Figure 9-3. Example of a Custom Summary Report Style

Reports and Graphs 213

Page 222: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Custom Form Report StyleA form report presents data in the format of a form (Figure 9-3). It includes data fields for a single record on a single page. You can choose which data fields to include as well as design the layout of the report. As an option the same data field selections can be used to produce a blank form for field data collection. You can set up and save the report with a layout theme, sorting and grouping theme, report options, and print and page size options.

Figure 9-4. Example of a Custom Form Report Style

214 Reports and Graphs

Page 223: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Custom Graph Report StyleA graph report presents data in a line graph format. The report shows survey data versus distance or time (Figure 9-5).

As an option you can set up the report to graph up to 16 bands of survey data. Each band includes an X-axis and Y-axis; survey readings and associated data for a user-selected survey type; and up to five user-selected surveys. For example, the report can include data for five different surveys with test point readings and data for any of the following indirect surveys supported by PCS: close interval, DCVG, ACVG, ACCA, Soil Resistivity, and Pearson.

Figure 9-5. Example of a Custom Graph Report Style

Reports and Graphs 215

Page 224: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Generating ReportsInformation in this section explains how to set up base or custom reports for viewing, printing, and exporting in a different file format such as PDF (portable document format). Topics include those in the following list:

• Set up report options

• Set up report layout (page 217)

• Export the report (page 218)

Set up report options1 Click Select ROWs to open the Select ROWs window. Select one or more pipeline

segments with facilities you want to include in the report and then click Close.

2 Click Reports/Graphs and select a report, such as Test Point Inspections (Reports/Graphs > Test Point Reports > Test Point Inspections).

3 Click Columnar Report tab > Options tab. Select the option Selected ROWs or Routes in Report Based On. If selecting Routes, click to select a survey route in the adjacent field.

NOTE: Selecting the option Selected ROWs generates a report for pipeline segments selected in the Select ROWs window. Choosing the Routes option and selecting a route generates a report for the pipeline segments included in the route.

4 Click the down arrow in Select Layout and choose a report layout in the drop-down list.

5 Select a sorting method for the report. Click the down arrow in Select Sorting Method and choose a sorting method in the drop-down list.

6 Select the method PCS should use to sort inspection dates. Click Oldest First or Newest First in Sort Dates to sort records with the oldest or newest inspection date first.

7 Click Indicate missing inspection readings if you want the report to include an empty box in place of each missing inspection reading.

216 Reports and Graphs

Page 225: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

8 Select one or more filters in Optional Filters to filter data in the report according to your filter selection. For example, click Active Facilities to only include active facilities in the report.

9 Click Ad Hoc Filter if you want to set up an optional filter for a specific record type and condition. Click the down arrow and select a record type in the drop-down list. Click the down arrow in the adjacent field and select a condition in the drop-down list.

For example, to include records with a missing milepost number, select Milepost and Is Missing.

10 Click the Layout tab and continue with the next section to setup a report layout.

Set up report layout1 Select which fields to include in the report. Double-click to open a field category in

Available Fields, such as All Fields. Double-click a field to move it to Selected Fields. The report includes all fields listed in Selected Fields.

NOTE: If you want to remove a field from the report, double-click the field in Selected Fields to move it back to Available Fields.

2 Arrange fields in the report. Report fields are arranged in the same order as those listed in Selected Fields. To move a field to a different position in the list and subsequently the report, click and drag a field button to a different position.

3 Click Paper Settings and Print Options.

4 Set up Paper Settings such as Size, Orientation, Fonts & Sizes, Column Spacing, and so on. When choosing options, view Width Remaining and Report Paper Size Estimate to determine if you need to adjust settings.

5 Set up Print Options such as Insert Lines Between Groups, Page Breaks, Reprint group headings on each page, and so on.

6 Click the favorites icon in the bottom right hand corner of the window if you want to add the report to your favorites (Reports/Graphs > My Favorite Reports).

7 Click Preview to open the Report Preview window.

Reports and Graphs 217

Page 226: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

8 If you want to include a watermark in the report, complete the following steps:

a Click Background > Watermark to open the Watermark window.

b Use controls in the Text Watermark tab to set up a text watermark. To set up an image watermark instead, click the Picture Watermark tab to configure settings.

c Click OK.

9 Click File > Print to print the report.

Export the report1 With the Report Preview window open, click File > Export Document.

2 Select a file format from the list of options. When the Export Options window opens set up export options and then click OK.

3 Use controls in the Save As window to select a destination folder for the report and then click Save.

4 Click File > Exit to close the Report Preview window.

My Favorite ReportsYou can access frequently-used reports and graphs faster by adding them to your My Favorite Reports list. To add or remove a favorite report, follow these steps:

1 Click Select ROWs to open the Select ROWs window. Select one or more pipeline segments with facilities you want to work with and then click Close.

2 Click Reports/Graphs and select a report, such as Test Point Inspections (Reports/Graphs > Test Point Reports > Test Point Inspections).

3 Click My Favorite Reports (red icon) in the bottom right corner of the Options or Layout tab to add the report to your favorites list.

4 Click Yes when the following message displays:

This report is not listed in your favorites. Would you like to add it?

218 Reports and Graphs

Page 227: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

5 To remove a report in your favorites list:

a Click Reports/Graphs > My Favorite Reports and open a report in your favorites list.

b Click My Favorite Reports (red icon) in the bottom right corner of the Options or Layout tab. Click Yes when the following message displays:

This report is already listed in your favorites. Would you like to remove it?

Reports and Graphs 219

Page 228: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Notes

220 Reports and Graphs

Page 229: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Reports and Graphs 221

Page 230: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

222 Reports and Graphs

Page 231: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

10

Two-Way Synchronization

Information in this chapter explains how to set up and use Two-way Synchronization (two-way sync). Topics include those in the following list:

• Two-way Sync Overview

• Process for Setting Up Two-way Sync (page 226)

• Create and Manage Replica Databases (page 227)

• Synchronize Replicas with the Master Database (page 228)

NOTE: Working with two-way synchronization and managing two-way replication is an administration task performed by the PCS administrator.

223

Page 232: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Two-way Sync OverviewTwo-way sync is an optional add-on in PCS. It requires a master PCS database installed on a network server or host computer. The master database manages two-way replication with one or more client replica databases.

Two-way replication is the process of synchronizing PCS data between the master database and a replica database installed on a remote workstation, such as a laptop or desktop computer (Figure 10-1, page 224).

Figure 10-1. Typical PCS System with Two-Way Synchronization

NOTE: Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. It also allows PCS to include the setting in the export file when using the Export Data command (File > Export Data). A check mark inside the Export Setting check box indicates the option is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

224 Two-Way Synchronization

Page 233: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Typical uses of two-way sync include those in the following list (Figure 10-2):

• A group of users in a regional field office need access to a PCS database that contains data only for their region. This is accomplished by creating a replica of the master database that contains data only for that regional office and making it available to each user.

• A user needs access to a PCS database to record data only for a specific pipeline segment. This is accomplished by creating a replica database of the master database that contains data only for that pipeline segment. After the user enters data, the replica database is synchronized with the master database. This adds data to other pipeline data in the master database.

• A group of remote users at a field office need access to the master database at company headquarters to make data changes and run reports. This is accomplished by creating a complete replica database of the master database for use at the field office. Data is kept current at the field office by synchronizing the replica database with the master database. Remote users are able to make changes and run reports without having to connect directly to the master database.

Figure 10-2. Typical Organizational Structure with Two-Way Synchronization

Two-Way Synchronization 225

Page 234: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Process for Setting Up Two-way SyncThe following information describes the process for setting up two-way sync on the master database and client replica(s):

1 For the master database, follow these steps:

a Click Tools > System Settings > Replication tab and verify all settings are correct.

b Click Tools > Synchronize > Replication Management. Set up client replicas in the Replica Management and Replica Information tabs.

c Begin with a complete set of updated records in the master database. Make all changes before synchronizing data between the master database and client replicas.

d Create a backup file of the master database (File > Backup Data). Distribute the backup to client replica users.

2 For the client replica, follow these steps:

a Install PCS with two-way sync.

b Click Tools > System Settings > Replication tab and verify all settings are correct. Setup the client replica with the path to the master database on the network server or host computer. For remote workstations, enter the path as either a UNC (uniform naming convention) path or mapped network drive.

c Using the backup file created earlier on the master database, restore the backup file on the client replica (File > Restore Data).

d Repeat step 2 for each client replica.

3 Place the master database in Server Mode (Tools > Synchronize > Server Mode). Synchronize data between the master database and client replicas.

Client replica users can now run PCS and perform tasks such as entering survey data and running reports.

NOTE: Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. It also allows PCS to include the setting in the export file when using the Export Data command (File > Export Data). A check mark inside the Export Setting check box indicates the option is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

226 Two-Way Synchronization

Page 235: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Create and Manage Replica DatabasesInformation in this section explains how to manage replicas on the master database. Topics include those in the following list:

• Create a new replica

• Delete a replica (page 228)

• Backup Replica Management (page 228)

Create a new replica1 Click Tools > Synchronize > Replica Management on the master database.

2 If the master database is not setup for replication, click OK when the Replication message displays. When the Replica Management window opens, type a name for the network server or host computer in the Server Name field and then click OK.

When the Server Configured message displays, click OK to begin creating a new replica.

3 Click New Replica. Type a name for the replica and then click OK to close the New Replica window.

4 Assign pipeline segments to the new replica. Double-click to select a pipeline segment in the left pane of the window. Click the top directional arrow in the middle of the window to move the selected pipeline segment to the left pane of the window. The right pane lists all selected pipeline segments.

To remove a pipeline segment in the right pane, double-click to select it and then click the top directional arrow in the middle of the window. This moves it back to the left pane of the window. The bottom directional arrow moves all selected pipeline segments.

Two-Way Synchronization 227

Page 236: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Delete a replica1 Click Tools > Synchronize > Replica Management.

2 Click the arrow in Replica ID/Name and select a replica from the drop-down list.

3 Click Yes when the Delete Replica message displays.

Backup Replica Management1 Click Tools > Synchronize > Replica Management.

2 Click Generate Backup to open the Save As window. Open a destination folder for the backup file. Type a name for the backup file in the Backup file field and then click Save.

3 Click OK when the Generate Backup message displays stating the backup is completed.

Synchronize Replicas with the Master DatabaseInformation in this section explains how to synchronize a client replica with the master database. The client replica initiates the synchronization process.

NOTE: The master database must be set in Server Mode for synchronization (Tools > Synchronize > Server Mode).

Complete the following steps on a client replica:

1 Click Tools > Synchronize > Synchronize with the Server. A progress indicator displays during the synchronization process and then a message stating synchronization is completed.

2 Click Tools > Synchronize > Synchronization Log to view a log.

NOTE: Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. It also allows PCS to include the setting in the export file when using the Export Data command (File > Export Data). A check mark inside the Export Setting check box indicates the option is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

228 Two-Way Synchronization

Page 237: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Notes

Two-Way Synchronization 229

Page 238: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

230 Two-Way Synchronization

Page 239: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

11

Managing the Database

Information in this chapter explains how to manage the PCS database. Topics include those in the following list:

• Backup and Restore the Database

• Database Cleanup (page 233)

• Import and Export Data (page 234)

• Data Modification Utility (page 237)

• Error Handler (page 241)

NOTE: Database management is an administration task performed by the PCS administrator or a PCS user ID setup with appropriate rights in Security Setup (Tools > Security > Security Setup).

231

Page 240: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Backup and Restore the DatabaseInformation in this section explains how to backup and restore the PCS database.

IMPORTANT: It is recommended that you periodically create a backup of the database. A backup copy is a safeguard against loss of work due to fire, theft, or other types of disasters. The PCS database restore function described later in this section requires a current backup of your database.

To backup the PCS database1 Click File > Backup Data to open the Backup Data window.

2 Click the ellipsis button (...) to open the Save As window. Locate a destination folder for the backup file and then click Save.

3 Click Back Up. When the Start System Backup message displays, click Yes to begin the backup process.

4 Click OK when the Full Backup Completed message displays.

To restore the PCS database1 Click File > Restore Data to open the Restore Data window.

2 Click the ellipsis button (...) to display the Open window. Locate the destination folder containing the most current backup copy of the PCS database. Select the backup file and then click OK.

3 Click Restore. When the Confirm Restore message displays, click Yes. When the following message displays click OK to close PCS and reset the system:

Restore is complete. PCS will now quit to reset the system.

232 Managing the Database

Page 241: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Database CleanupThe following table (Table 11-1) includes a description of the commands available in the Database Cleanup menu (File > Cleanup).

Table 11-1. Database Cleanup

Menu Command Description

Reindex All Databases The PCS database uses an index file to identify the position of each record in the database. As you add and delete records, PCS modifies the index file to reflect new record positions. The reindex process restores database efficiency by updating the index.

Click File > Database Cleanup > Reindex All Databases.

Reindex/Compress All Databases

IMPORTANT: In addition to the reindexing the database (Reindex All Databases), this command permanently removes all deleted records from the database. Deleted records cannot be restored after running Reindex/Compress All Databases. Before running this menu command, perform a backup of the PCS database (File > Backup Data).

Click File > Database Cleanup > Reindex/Compress All Databases.

Archive Change Log Records

PCS automatically archives all change log records for the master database at midnight when server mode is running. You can however set up an archive schedule in System Settings that identifies a daily time schedule PCS should run the archive process (Tools > System Settings > Replication).

Fully synchronized records are maintained in a table in the PCS data folder. This allows you to run a change history report that includes all archived changes.

Three related files are generated during the archive process; they include a .dbf, .fpt, and .cdx file. The files are labeled arcchglog## where ## is a number between 01 and 99, such as arcchglog01.dbf, arcchglog01.fpt, and arcchglog01.cdx.

The archive grows to 1.8 GB in size before PCS creates a new archive.

Click File > Database Cleanup > Reindex/Archive Change Log Records.

Managing the Database 233

Page 242: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Import and Export DataInformation in this section explains how to export and import PCS data and system items, such as System and Security Settings, Field Customizations, Validation Tables, and so on. Use these functions between PCS users. Topics in this section include those in the following list:

• Export PCS data

• Export PCS system items (page 236)

• Import PCS data or system items (page 236)

NOTE: PCS backup files include the .zip file extension. Use only PCS to extract these files; do not use a file compression software such as WinZip or PKWare.

Database Integrity Check

Detects and removes orphan records, removes invalid characters from fields, and right justifies all pipe code column entries.

Click File > Database Cleanup > Database Integrity Check .

Integrity Check Log Log of all changes that occurred during a Database Integrity Check .

Click File > Database Cleanup > Integrity Check Log.

Table 11-1. Database Cleanup (continued)

Menu Command Description

234 Managing the Database

Page 243: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Export PCS data1 Click Select ROWs to open the Select ROWs window. Select one or more pipeline

segments with facilities you want to work with and then click Close.

2 Click File > Export Data > Data tab.

3 If you want to export only the hierarchy structure, click Export Hierarchical Data Only.

4 Select facility types to export. Click each facility type in Include These Facilities. If selecting ISM survey types or ILIM In-Line Inspection, also select surveys to export. Press Ctrl or Shift and then select surveys for export.

5 To include optional settings in the export file, follow these steps:

a If you want to include certain mileposts in the export file, type the starting milepost number in the Include Milepost from field. Type the ending milepost number in the to field.

b If you want to include inspection and maintenance records for a particular date range, type a start date in the Include inspections/maintenance from field. Type an end data in the to field.

c If you want to include routes and/or links to documents, click Routes and/or Document Links.

6 Click the ellipsis button (…) in Export File to open the Save As window. Locate the destination folder for the export file and then click Save.

7 Click Export Data and then click OK when the message Export Completed displays.

Managing the Database 235

Page 244: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Export PCS system items1 If you plan to export System and Security Settings, click Tools > System

Settings and verify the option Export Setting is selected for each System Setting you want to include in the export file.

2 Click Select ROWs to open the Select ROWs window. Select one or more pipeline segments with facilities you want to work with and then click Close.

3 Click File > Export Data > System tab.

4 Select system items to include in the export file in Select the System Items to be Exported. A check mark inside the check box indicates the system item is selected. Click the check box again to remove the check mark and de-select the system item.

5 Click the ellipsis button (…) in Export File to open the Save As window. Locate the destination folder for the export file and then click Save.

6 Click Export System and then click OK when the message Export Completed displays.

Import PCS data or system items1 Click File > Import Data to open the Import Data window.

2 Click the ellipsis button (…) in Import File to open the Import File window. Locate and select the export file (PCS data or system items). Click Select and then click Import.

3 If the you are importing system items and the message Cannot Import UDFs displays, click Yes or No to continue.

4 Click OK when the Import Completed message displays. If you are importing system items, PCS automatically shuts down to reset.

236 Managing the Database

Page 245: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Data Modification UtilityInformation in this section explains how to use Data Modification Utility. Topics include those in the following list:

• Move Facilities

• Mass Create Facilities (page 239)

• Shift Mileposts (page 240)

• Data Options (page 241)

IMPORTANT: Before using Data Modification, it is recommended that you make a backup of the PCS database (File > Backup Data).

Move FacilitiesComplete the following steps to move facilities, inspection records, and maintenance records from one pipeline segment to another. Use this feature when splitting or combining pipeline segments.

1 Click Tools > Data Utilities > Database Modification Utility to open the Data Modification Utility window.

2 Click OK when the following warning message displays:

The Data Modification Utility allows a user to make extensive changes to their database. We recommend you perform a database backup prior to running this process.

3 Click the Move ROW Facilities tab if the window is not visible.

4 Double-click to select a source pipeline segment in Source ROWs. Double-click to select a target pipeline segment in Target ROWs.

5 Click to select one or more facility types in Facilities Filter.

6 Click Location or Address in Facilities in Source ROW to sort facilities by location or address.

Managing the Database 237

Page 246: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

7 Complete one of the following steps to select and move facilities (also includes inspection and maintenance records) from the source ROW to the target ROW:

• to move all facilities listed in Facilities in Source ROW, click the bottom arrow button,

• to move a single facility, click to select the facility and then click the top arrow button,

• to move multiple facilities, press Ctrl while selecting facilities and then click the top arrow button.

8 Complete the following steps to move inspection and/or maintenance records from Facilities in Source ROW to Facilities in Target ROW:

a Click Move Inspections and Maintenance to expand the window.

b Click the Inspections to select inspection records or Maintenance to select maintenance records.

c Select a facility in Facilities in Source ROW to view a list of inspection and/or maintenance records available for selection.

d Select an inspection and/or maintenance record in Facilities in Source ROW and then click the top arrow button. To move all records, click the bottom arrow button.

NOTE: Clicking inside the window in Facilities in Source ROW or Facilities in Target ROW changes the direction of the arrows. To move facilities, inspection records, or maintenance records back to Facilities in Source ROW: click inside the Facilities in Target ROW window; select the facility or record; click the top or bottom arrow button.

238 Managing the Database

Page 247: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Mass Create FacilitiesUse Mass-Create Facilities to add a new facility type with the same milepost number as an existing facility type. Milepost numbers automatically copy from the existing facility type to the new facility type. For example, use Mass-Create Facilities to add a new galvanic anode facility type with the same milepost numbers as an existing test point facility type. This feature is helpful in reducing data entry time and the possibility of data entry errors.

Complete the following steps:

1 Click Tools > Data Utilities > Database Modification Utility to open the Data Modification Utility window.

2 Click OK when the following warning message displays:

The Data Modification Utility allows a user to make extensive changes to their database. We recommend you perform a database backup prior to running this process.

3 Click the Mass-Create Facilities tab.

4 Double-click to select a pipeline segment in Source ROWs. The selected pipeline segment should include facility milepost numbers you want to mass create.

5 Select a facility type in Source Facility Type to display a list of facilities in Facilities in Source ROW.

6 Click Location or Address in Facilities in Source ROW to sort facilities by location or address.

7 Click to select an existing facility listed in Facilities in Source ROW. To select multiple facilities, press Ctrl while selecting each facility.

8 Identify the facility type of the new facilities you plan to mass create. Click the down arrow in Target Facility Type and select a facility type in the drop-down list.

9 Click Create New Facilities. When the Mass-Create Facilities message displays, click Yes to add new facilities.

Managing the Database 239

Page 248: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Shift MilepostsUse Shift Mileposts to shift the direction and distance between mileposts. If metric mode is enabled in System Settings, shift distance is in meters instead of feet (Tools > System Settings > General tab).

Complete the following steps:

1 Click Tools > Data Utilities > Database Modification Utility to open the Data Modification Utility window.

2 Click OK when the following warning message displays:

The Data Modification Utility allows a user to make extensive changes to their database. We recommend you perform a database backup prior to running this process.

3 Click the Shift Milepost tab.

4 Double-click to select a pipeline segment in Source ROWs. The selected pipeline segment should include facility milepost numbers you want to shift.

5 Select a facility type in Source Facility Type to display a list of facilities in Facilities in Source ROW.

6 Click Location or Address in Facilities in Source ROW to sort facilities by location or address.

7 Click to select a facility listed in Facilities in Source ROW. To select multiple facilities, press Ctrl while selecting each facility.

8 Complete the following steps to select a shift direction and distance in Shift Direction and Distance in Feet:

a To select a shift direction, click the down arrow a select + or –. Select + (plus) to shift mileposts forward or – (minus) to shift mileposts back.

b To indicate a shift distance, type the number of feet (or meters) in the adjacent field.

c Click Shift to shift mileposts.

240 Managing the Database

Page 249: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Data OptionsUse Data Options to select an external system ID that will be used in place of ROW Code and Milepost in when using Bridge.

The external system ID must be associated with a UDF (user-defined field) previously created in Field and UDF Customizations (Tools > Data Utilities > Field and UDF Customizations). For instructions about how to create a UDF for an external system ID, refer to Chapter 6, Bridge.

Complete the following steps to select an external system ID:

1 Click Tools > Data Utilities > Data Options to open Data Options Wizard.

2 Click Next in the welcome page to display Select an External ID field.

3 Click the down arrow in External ID selection and select an external ID in the drop-down list. Click Next to continue.

4 In Set date and time options, select Date or Date/Time (default) to have PCS reference facility inspections by date or date and time.

5 If you want existing grid and/or columnar report layouts to also use your date and time selection, click Update existing grid layouts and/or Update existing columnar report layouts.

6 Click Next and then click Finish to complete Data Options set up.

Error HandlerError Handler is a utility used by Technical Support. It records errors that help to identify software or hardware errors.

To open the Error Handler log, click Tools > Error Handler. If no errors have occurred, the message No errors have occurred displays instead of the Error Handler log.

Managing the Database 241

Page 250: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Notes

242 Managing the Database

Page 251: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

A

Field Descriptions

This chapter provides a description of PCS fields. Fields labeled Record share the same description as their counterpart, such as Record Current and Current. The Record Current field must be added in the Information grid to enter data in the Current field of the Inspections grid.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions

Field Name Description

# of Current Distributions Number of pipelines receiving current from a rectifier. This field is generated by PCS as current distributions are added.

See CPDM module Reports/Graphs > Survey Report > Page Layout tab.

AC Input Voltage (v) coming in to the rectifier from a power source.

See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifiers Information grid View > Data View > Layout tab.

243

Page 252: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

AC Power (Watts) Power consumed by rectifier (from the power source). This value is system-supplied and calculated as follows:

AC Power (Watts) = 3600 x Kh Factor x RevolutionsSeconds

If Kh Factor, Revolutions, or Seconds value is unknown, AC Power value may be directly input. Value may be up to six (6) digits. Meter Kh carries to Kh Factor field when a reading is created.

See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifiers Inspections grid View > Data View > Layout tab.

AC Service A history information field that can include data for AC voltage, AC current, number of phases and so on (which make up the complete source of the incoming AC power).

CPDM Rectifiers Information grid: View > Data View > Layout tab.

See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifiers Inspections grid View > Data View > Layout tab.

Account The power company account number. This can also be the customer’s account number for gas service.

See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifiers Inspections grid View > Data View > Layout tab.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

244 Appendix A. Field Descriptions

Page 253: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Address This is a system calculated field. PCS supplies the value in the Address field using based on data entered in the following fields:

• Address - Street Number

• Address - Pre-Direction

• Address - Street

• Address - Suffix

• Address - Post-Direction

Using 125 E Grand Bluff St NW as an example:

• 125 is the Address - Street Number

• E is the Address - Pre-Direction

• Grand Bluff is the Address - Street

• St is the Address - Suffix

• NW is the Address - Post-Direction

See any module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Information grid > Data View > Layout tab.

Address Pre-Direction The tag at the beginning of a street name that indicates direction, such as 125 E Grand Bluff St. NW, where E is the pre-direction. See any PCS module, Information grid.

Anomaly Direction Character field that supports up to seven characters. If survey readings were taken at regular intervals during an ACVG survey, use this field to indicate if the anomaly is in front of or behind the surveyor. This field does not apply to ACVG surveys that only record an ACVG point at the anomaly. Typical entries for this field are Forward or Reverse.

See ISM module Data Entry > Edit Indirect Survey Data > ACVG tab.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

Appendix A. Field Descriptions 245

Page 254: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

APB (Ppm) Acid Reducing Bacteria (APB) measurement data in parts-per-million (Ppm). Add the field Record APB (Ppm) in the ICM Samples Information grid to allow data entry in the APB (Ppm) field of the Inspections grid. See ICM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Samples > Information and Inspections grid.

Apparatus Used Type of device used to record measurement data. Add the field and enable the check box for Record Apparatus Used in the PLSM Information grid to enable data entry in the Apparatus Used field of the Inspections grid. See PLSM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Samples > Information and Inspections grid.

Apparent Leak Location Data entry field for entering leak location data. See LSM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Maintenance grid.

Average P/S Average pipe-to-soil value measured in volts. Add the field and enable the check box for Record Average P/S (Volts) in the Test Point Information grid to enable data entry in the Average P/S field in the Inspections grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Information and Inspections grid.

B31G Numeric value used in ILIM calculations to determine the remaining strength (PSI) of the external corroded area of the pipeline. Data entry values are typically reported in whole numbers indicating the safe operating pressure the corroded area of the pipeline can be operated and also compared to the MAOP (maximum allowable operating pressure) of the pipeline. See ILIM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > In-Line Inspection tab.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

246 Appendix A. Field Descriptions

Page 255: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Bond Current Adjusted Enable the check box to indicate a change was made to the bond current. In the Foreign Bonds Inspections grid, this field works in conjunction with the fields Bond Current Found (Amps) and Bond Current Left (Amps) when the Record field for each is added in the Information grid.

When making bond adjustments: (1) enable the field Bond Current Adjusted; (2) enter the pre-adjusted value in the field Bond Current Found (Amps); and then enter the adjusted value in the field Bond Current Left (Amps).

See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Foreign Bonds Information and Inspections grids > Data View > Layout tab.

Bond Current Found (Amps)

Bond current measured during inspection. In the Foreign Bonds Inspections grid, the field works in conjunction with the fields Bond Current Adjusted and Bond Current Left (Amps) when the Record field for each is added in the Foreign Bonds Information grid.

See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Foreign Bonds Information and Inspections grids > Data View > Layout tab.

Bond Current Left (Amps) Bond current measured after inspection. In the Foreign Bonds Inspections grid, the field works in conjunction with the fields Bond Current Adjusted and Bond Current Found (Amps) when the Record field for each is added in the Foreign Bonds Information grid.

See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Foreign Bonds Information and Inspections grids > Data View > Layout tab.

Bond Shunt Factor (A/mV)

Amperage value of the bond shunt factor. Shunt factor includes the value in this field and the value in the Bond Shunt Rating (mV/A) field. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Foreign Bonds > Information and Inspections grid.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

Appendix A. Field Descriptions 247

Page 256: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Bond Shunt Factor (A/mV)

Amperage value of the bond shunt factor. Add the field in either the Foreign Bonds Information or Inspections grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Foreign Bonds > Information or Inspections grid.

Bond Type Type of bond, such as resistance or direct.

Casing IRF (Volts) Voltage measurement indicating the potential of the casing relative to the soil with interrupted rectifier current. This field is activated when the field Record Casing IRF (Volts) check box is added and enabled in the Test Points Information grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Test Points > Information grid.

Casing IRF (Volts) Maximum

Maximum value allowed for data entry in the field Casing IRF (Volts) in the Test Points Inspections grid. Casing IRF (Volts) Maximum is typically added in the Test Points Information grid but can be added in the Inspections grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Test Points > Information or Inspections grid.

Casing IRF (Volts) Minimum

Minimum value allowed for data entry in the field Casing IRF (Volts) in the Test Points Inspections grid. Casing IRF (Volts) Minimum is typically added in the Test Points Information grid but can be added in the Inspections grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Test Points > Information or Inspections grid.

Casing P/S (Volts) Voltage measurement indicating the potential of the casing relative to the soil. This field is activated when the Record Casing P/S (Volts) check box is added and enabled in the Test Points Information grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Test Points > Information grid.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

248 Appendix A. Field Descriptions

Page 257: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Casing P/S (Volts) Minimum and Maximum

Minimum and maximum value allowed for data entry in the field Casing P/S (Volts) in the Test Points Inspections grid. Casing P/S (Volts) Minimum and Casing P/S (Volts) Maximum are typically added in the Test Points Information grid but can be added in the Inspections grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Test Points > Information or Inspections grid.

Casing Status Status of the casing such as: short, not short, electrolytic, or metallic. To enable this field for data entry, (1) add and enable the field Record Casing Status in the Test Points Information grid; (2) then add Casing Status in the Inspections grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Test Points > Information and Inspections grid.

Census Date Date a census classification was applied or assigned to a pipeline segment. See PLSM module Data Entry > Edit Population Classification Data.

Center P/S (Volts) Structure reading in volts when a half-cell is under the center of the tank. To enable this field for data entry, (1) add and enable the field Record Center P/S (Volts) in the Tanks Information grid; (2) then add Center P/S (Volts) in the Inspections grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Tanks > Information and Inspections grid.

Center P/S (Volts) Minimum and Maximum

Minimum and maximum value allowed for data entry in the field Center P/S (Volts) in the Test Points Inspections grid. Center P/S (Volts) Minimum and Center P/S (Volts) Maximum are typically added in the Tanks Information grid but can be added in the Inspections grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Tanks > Information or Inspections grid.

City City where a facility is located.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

Appendix A. Field Descriptions 249

Page 258: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Close Direction Direction the valve wheel turns to close the valve. Enter data such as CW for clockwise or CCW for counter clockwise. See VM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Information or Inspections grid.

Coating Type of coating applied to the pipeline, such as tape and epoxy. See ACM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Information or Inspections grid.

Coating Condition Description of coating condition. To enable this field for data entry: (1) add and enable the field Record Coating Condition in the ACM Information grid; (2) then add the field Coating Condition in the Inspections grid. See ACM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Information and Inspections grid.

Coke Breeze Type of coke breeze, such as metallurgical and petroleum-based. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifiers > Information or Inspections grid.

Conductivity Conductivity measurement gathered during a soil resistivity survey. Measurements are in microSiemens (µS), a metric unit of measurement for conductivity, as indicated during the field survey by the inspection tool. See ISM module Data Entry > Edit Indirect Survey Data > Soil Resistivity tab.

Connection Type Type of connection used to secure valve to pipeline. See VM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Information or Inspections grid.

Contact Name of the person at the foreign company to contact about a bond. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Foreign Bonds > Information or Inspections grid.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

250 Appendix A. Field Descriptions

Page 259: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Critical Bond Check box to indicate if a bond is critical based on location and connection. Critical bond is used in scheduling. Click to place a check mark inside the check box if the bond is considered a critical bond. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Foreign Bonds > Information or Inspections grid.

Crossing Type Remark field for entering the type of crossing, such as a road or railroad. See PLSM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Crossings > Information or Inspections grid.

Current Demand Total current required to protect a pipeline segment. See CPDM module Reports/Graphs > Rectifier Reports > Current Density Summary.

Current Density A PCS calculated report field indicating the amount of current required per square foot to change the structure’s potential to –0.85 volts. See CPDM Reports/Graphs > Rectifier Reports > Current Density Summary.

PCS calculates Current Density using the footage value entered in the Surface Area field of Edit ROW Detail. Surface Area is the total length and width of the pipeline expressed in feet. If the grid is populated with values for Current Distribution (Percentage) in the Rectifier Current Distributions mini-grid (see Rectifiers Information grid) and Bond Current Found (Amps) in the Foreign Bonds Inspection grid, these values are also used to calculate Current Density.

Current Distribution (Percentage)

Distribution of current on the pipeline in a percent value. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifiers > Rectifier Information > Rectifier Current Distributions mini-grid.

Decibel Reading (dB) Decibel reading measured in millibels (mB, decibel microvolts) by the inspection tool using the A-Frame method during an ACVG survey. See ISM module Data Entry > Edit Indirect Survey Data > ACVG.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

Appendix A. Field Descriptions 251

Page 260: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Depth Pipeline depth in inches as measured by the PCM inspection tool during an ACCA survey. See ISM module Data Entry > Edit Indirect Survey Data > ACCA.

Diameter Distance from wall to wall across a tank. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Tanks > Information or Inspections grid.

Diode Rating Remark field for entering amperage rating of diode in rectifier. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifiers > Information or Inspections grid.

Due Date from Schedule Date a facility is scheduled for survey based on settings in Edit Schedule Settings. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Schedule Settings and Edit Data by Schedule > Information or Inspections grid.

East P/S (Volts) Structure reading in volts when a half-cell is placed near the east side of a tank. The field is activated for data entry in the Tanks Inspections grid when the check box Record Cardinal Points is added and enabled in the Tanks Information grid.

East P/S (Volts) Minimum/Maximum

Minimum and maximum voltage value allowed for data entry in the field East P/S (Volts) in the Tanks Inspections grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Tanks > Information or Inspections grid.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

252 Appendix A. Field Descriptions

Page 261: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Effective Date Date a history record becomes effective. New history records are created when an important piece of permanent information changes; for example, when the protection criteria value for a test point changes. When this happens, (1) create a new test point history record in the Test Point Informations grid; (2) then change the protection criteria value in the new history record. This allows you to know when the protection criteria value changed and what the previous value was prior to the change.

Use Effective Date to indicate when a device becomes inactive or is taken out of service. Generally any active device such as a test point or rectifier should not have an effective date.

Efficiency A system-provided value calculated as follows. The value can also be manually entered but is not recommended. Also refer to AC Power Watts for more information.

Rectifier Output Volts Left x Rectifier Output Current Left x 100AC Power (Watts)

See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifiers > Inspections grid.

Efficiency Filter Check box for indicating whether or not the rectifier is using an efficiency filter. Click to place a check mark inside the check box to indicate an efficiency filter is present. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifiers > Information grid.

Elevation (Feet) Elevation in feet as reported by the GPS device for a facility, survey point, or anomaly on the pipeline. See ISM module Data Entry > Edit Indirect Survey Data > DCVG.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

Appendix A. Field Descriptions 253

Page 262: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Export Setting Enabling the option Export Setting for a property setting in System Settings allows PCS to synchronize the setting between the master and replica databases during synchronization. It also allows PCS to include the setting in the export file when using the Export Data command (File > Export Data). A check mark inside the Export Setting check box indicates the option is enabled (Tools > System Settings).

Facility Active Use the Facility Active check box in the Information grid to indicate when a facility is active or inactive according to survey status.

See any module Information grid View > Data View > Layout tab.

Facility Delinquent Date Date a facility is considered to be past due for inspection.

Facility ID Identification code that identifies a facility (test point, rectifier, foreign bond, galvanic anode, and tank).

Galvanic Anode Initial Current

Initial current output at install. Additional readings should be recorded in the field Galvanic Current (Amps) in the Galvanic Anodes Inspections grid. To record data in the Inspections grid, first add the field Galvanic Current (Amps) and enable the check box in the Information grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Galvanic Anodes > Information and Inspections grid.

Galvanic Anode Shunt Factor (A/mV)

Amperage value of the galvanic anode shunt factor. Shunt factor includes the value in this field and the value entered in the Galvanic Anode Shunt Rating (mV/A) field. To activate this field for use, add and then enable the field Record Galvanic Current (Amps) in the Information grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Galvanic Anodes > Information and Inspections grid.

Galvanic Anode Size (Lbs.)

Weight in pounds of sacrificial anodes such as 32 lbs. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Galvanic Anodes > Information and Inspections grid.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

254 Appendix A. Field Descriptions

Page 263: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Galvanic Anode To Soil (Volts)

Driving potential of the anode relative to the soil. Value entered in volts. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Galvanic Anodes > Information or Inspections grid.

Galvanic Anode Type Type of anode such as magnesium, aluminum, or zinc. Add the field in the Galvanic Anodes Information or Inspections grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Galvanic Anodes > Information or Inspections grid.

Galvanic Current (Amps) Minimum/Maximum

Minimum and maximum current output. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Galvanic Anodes > Information and Inspections grid.

Galvanic Number of Anodes

Rectifier facilities: Number of impressed current anodes at a rectifier / ground bed installation. If there are multiple ground beds at a rectifier, this will be the total number of anodes associated with that rectifier.

Galvanic Anodes: Number of sacrificial anodes at a galvanic anode installation.

See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Galvanic Anode Information grid.

Gas Indicator Leak Test Remark field for describing the condition of the valve coating at inspection. To enable the field for data entry: (1) add and enable the field Record Gas Indicator Leak Test in the LSM Information grid; (2) then add the field Gas Indicator Leak Test in the Inspections grid. See LSM module Data Entry by Facility > Information and Inspections grid.

Hierarchy: Level 1 Name through Level 5 Name

User setting for name of system hierarchy levels. PCS supports up to five (5) hierarchy levels.

See any module Tools > System Settings > Hierarchy tab.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

Appendix A. Field Descriptions 255

Page 264: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

ILI Action Check box to indicate if further action needs to be taken for a corroded pipe. A check mark inside the check box indicates Yes; an empty check box indicates No. Depending on your selection, Yes or No is included in graphs and reports in the column labeled ILI Active. The default setting is an empty check box (or No). See ILIM module > Data Entry > Edit In-line Inspection Data by Facility > Visual Sites tab.

ILI Depth Indicates the depth of an anomaly or defect (corrosion, dent, scratch, pit, and so on) in the pipe using decimal inches.

ILI Depth Percentage Indicates the depth of an anomaly or defect (corrosion, dent, scratch, pit, and so on) in the pipe using whole numbers.

ILI Feature Grade List of grades associated with a feature (corrosion metal loss; dents; cracks; welds; bends; repairs). Vendor-dependent. This field can be used in conjunction with the ILI Action field and is also used to graph “Feature” data. If a vendor grades a feature according to its severity, this field can be used to trigger an action that needs to be taken.

ILI Feature Name Generic name for a feature (such as anomaly, corrosion metal loss, dents, cracks, welds, bends, repairs). This field is vendor-dependent and is also used to graph feature data.

ILI Inspection Priority Alpha-numeric field for entering the inspection priority based on your company’s criteria.

ILI Length Numeric field for entering the length of a feature in inches. Typically used for an anomaly.

ILI Odometer Numeric field for entering the length of the pipeline segment in feet as measured and recorded by the odometer wheel of an in-line inspection tool. See ILIM module > Data Entry > Edit In-line Inspection Data by Facility > Visual Sites tab.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

256 Appendix A. Field Descriptions

Page 265: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

ILI Orientation Numeric time field for entering the clock (o’clock) orientation of the pipeline to help locate the position of a feature on the pipeline. For example, the position of a feature on the pipeline with:

• 12:00 o’clock referring to the top of the pipeline.

• 3:00 o’clock referring to the right side of the pipeline in the forward direction of the inspection tool.

• 6:00 o’clock referring to the bottom of the pipeline.

• 9:00 o’clock referring to the left side of the pipeline in the forward direction of the inspection tool.

ILI PRF Numeric field for entering the in-line inspection PRF (pressure reduction factor) based on the vendor import of the remaining strength calculation. See ILIM module > Data Entry > Edit In-line Inspection Data by Facility > Visual Sites tab.

Insulator Shunt Factor (A/mV)

Amperage value of the insulator shunt factor. Shunt factor consists of the value in this field and the value in the field Insulator Shunt Rating (mV/A). This field is activated when the Record Insulator Current (Amps) check box is added and enabled in the Test Points Information grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Test Points > Information and Inspections grid.

IR (Percentage) Numeric field that supports a 5 digit decimal number with two places after the decimal point (such as 123.45).

Use this field to enter a value that represents the estimated size or severity of a holiday as a percentage. The value you enter is the difference between the over-the-line (OTL) to remote earth (RE) readings divided by the signal strength (SS) of the voltage gradient at the anomaly.

IR (Percentage) = (OTL – RE or RE – OTL) ÷ SS at anomaly

See ISM module Data Entry > Edit Indirect Survey Data > View > Data View > Layout tab.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

Appendix A. Field Descriptions 257

Page 266: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Location Code Alphanumeric code assigned to pipeline segment. Field accepts up to five alphanumeric characters.

Milepost Number representing a testing or facility location on a pipeline such as 23+123. May also be referred to as station number, milepost marker, or station marker. See Tools > System Settings > General tab > User location name.

Milepost Marker See Milepost.

Negative Shunt Factor (A/mV)

Amperage value of the negative shunt factor. Shunt factor consists of the value in this field and the value in the field Negative Shunt Rating (mV/A). A value entered in the Rectifier Output Shunt Factor (A/mV) field in the Rectifiers Information grid activates the Rectifier Negative Inspections mini-grid for data entry in the Inspections grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifiers > Information and Inspections grid.

Number of Crossings PCS calculated field showing the total number of crossings, such as road crossings, railroad crossings, foreign pipeline crossings, and fence lines. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Test Points Information grid.

Number of Leaks Numeric field for entering number of leaks. Add the field and enable the check box for Record Number of Leaks in the LSM Information grid to enable data entry in the Number of Leaks field in the Inspections grid. See LSM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Information and Inspections grid.

Number of Negatives PCS calculated field showing the total number of negatives in the Rectifier Negative Information mini-grid. See CPDM module > Edit Data by Facility >Rectifiers > Information grid.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

258 Appendix A. Field Descriptions

Page 267: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Number of Turns Number of turns to open a valve. Click the check box Record Number of Turns in the Information grid to enable Number of Turns for data entry in the Inspections grid. See VM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Information and Inspections grid.

Original Milepost Before station numbers are re-aligned using the Rubber Banding function in Survey Maintenance, PCS automatically stores original station numbers whenever survey data is entered or imported using the Allegro field computer, Excel spreadsheet, or Bridge. See ISM module > Edit Indirect Survey Data > (survey type) > Data View.

Original Milepost may be labeled differently in your PCS system based on the User Location Name specified in System Settings. For example, Station Number may be used instead of Milepost.

OTL to Remote Earth Over-the-Line to Remote Earth. Use this field to enter a value in millivolts (mV) that represents the sum of all side drain measurements taken during a DCVG survey for a survey point on the pipeline. You can either type data in the field or import data using Bridge. This numeric field supports up to four digits. See ISM module > Edit Indirect Survey Data > DCVG tab.

P/S Offset Offset added to a P/S reading collected on the Allegro field computer. Use this field when using a permanent reference cell other than copper-copper sulfate. PCS uses the value to convert the reading to the equivalent copper-copper sulfate reading. See CPDM module > Test Points > Information grid.

PBN Dial Reading Measurement reading at inspection. See ICM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Probes > Inspections grid.

PCM Current Enter a PCM current reading as measured in mA and dB by the PCM inspection tool during an ACCA survey. Data can be entered or imported using Bridge. See ISM module > Edit Indirect Survey Data > ACCA tab.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

Appendix A. Field Descriptions 259

Page 268: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Periodic Survey A survey conducted more often than every 12 months, such as monthly or bi-monthly rectifier surveys. See CPDM module > Rectifiers > Inspections.

Periodic Survey Year The year a Periodic Survey is performed. See CPDM module > Rectifiers > Inspections.

Permanent Comments Comments permanently associated with a facility. Permanent Comments do not typically change during each survey year. Comments that apply to a specific survey should be entered in the Survey Remarks field; such as comments for 2011 Annual Survey. See CPDM module, any facility grid.

Phone Number Phone number of person to contact at another company regarding a foreign bond. See CPDM module > Foreign Bonds > Inspections grid.

Plot Facility Check box for choosing which data to include or exclude in reports and graphs. To include data, click to place a check mark inside the check box. To exclude data, click to remove the check mark. See CPDM module > any facility Inspections grid.

Plot this Point Check box for choosing which data to include or exclude in reports and graphs. To include data, click to place a check mark inside the check box. To exclude data, click to remove the check mark. See ISM module > any survey type.

Polarity Direction of current flow at a foreign bond. This field is activated when the Record Polarity check box is added and enabled in the Foreign Bonds Information grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Foreign Bonds > Information and Inspections grid.

Population Classification Population classification (pop class) ratings 1 through 4 based on DOT Regulation 49CFR192.5. Inspection frequency is determined by the pop class and crossing data entered for each patrol section.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

260 Appendix A. Field Descriptions

Page 269: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Power Company Phone Number

Phone number of the power company for a rectifier installation site.

Pre-Install P/S Pipe-to-soil reading taken before installation of galvanic anodes. See CPDM module > Galvanic Anodes > Information or Inspections grid.

Property Rights Code that identifies any property rights that might impact inspection or access to a pipeline. The field supports up to 10 alphanumeric characters including spaces, such as B #1234567. See LSM module > Edit Data by Facility > Maintenance grid.

Record Cardinal Points Click the check box Record Cardinal Points to enable the following fields for data entry in the Tanks Inspections grid: North P/S (Volts), South P/S (Volts), East P/S (Volts), West P/S (Volts). See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Tanks > Information grid.

Record Center P/S (Volts) Click the check box Record Center P/S (Volts) to enable the field Center P/S (Volts) for data entry in the Tanks Inspections grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Tanks > Information grid.

Record Intercardinal Points

Click the check box Record Intercardinal Points to enable the following fields for data entry in the Tanks Inspections grid: NE P/S (Volts), SE P/S (Volts), NW P/S (Volts), SW P/S (Volts). See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Tanks > Information grid.

Record Mid P/S (Volts) Click the check box Record Mid P/S (Volts) to enable the field Mid P/S (Volts) for data entry in the Tanks Inspections grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Tanks > Information grid.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

Appendix A. Field Descriptions 261

Page 270: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Record Secondary Intercardinal Points

Click the check box Record Secondary Intercardinal Points to enable the following fields for data entry in the Tanks Inspections grid: ENE P/S (Volts), ESE P/S (Volts), NNE P/S (Volts), NNW P/S (Volts), SSE P/S (Volts), WNW P/S (Volts), and WSW P/S (Volts). See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Tanks > Information grid.

Rectifier Anode Size Dimensions of impressed current anodes such as 3 x 60. Add the field in the Rectifiers Information grid and then add the field Record Rectifier Anode Size in the Rectifiers Inspections grid to have PCS display information entered in the Information grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifiers > Information and Inspections grid.

Rectifier Anode Type Type of anode such as graphite or high silicon material. Add the field in the Rectifiers Information or Inspections grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifiers > Information or Inspections grid.

Rectifier Current Adjusted

Enable the check box to indicate a change was made to the rectifier output current. In the Rectifier Inspections grid, this field works in conjunction with the fields Rectifier Output Current Found (Volts), Rectifier Output Current Left (Volts), Rectifier Output Current Found (Amps), and Rectifier Output Current Left (Amps) when the Record field for each of these fields is added in the Information grid.

When making rectifier output current adjustments: (1) enable the field Rectifier Current Adjusted; (2) enter the pre-adjusted value in the fields Rectifier Output Current Found (Volts) and Rectifier Output Current Found (Amps); (3) and then enter the adjusted value in the fields Rectifier Output Current Left (Volts) and Rectifier Output Current Left (Amps).

See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifier Information and Inspections grids > Data View > Layout tab.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

262 Appendix A. Field Descriptions

Page 271: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Rectifier Current Adjusted

When a change is made to the rectifier current at inspection: (1) click to add a check mark in the Rectifier Current Adjusted check box; (2) enter the adjusted reading in the fields Rectifier Output Volts Left (Volts) and Rectifier Output Current Left (Amps). See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Inspections grid.

Rectifier Output Current Found (Amps)

Initial rectifier reading at inspection. PCS multiplies the reading by the rectifier shunt factor when the fields Rated Rectifier Output Volts (Volts) and Rated Rectifier Output Current (Amps) are populated in the Rectifiers Information grid. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifiers > Information and Inspections grid.

Rectifier Output Current Found (Amps) Minimum/Maximum

Minimum and maximum value allowed for data entry in the field Rectifier Output Current Found (Amps). See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifiers > Information or Inspections grid.

Rectifier Output Current Left (Amps)

See Rectifier Current Adjusted.

Rectifier Output Shunt Factor (A/mV)

Amperage value of the anode shunt factor. Refers to the shunt used to measure the output current of each anode in a positive junction box. Shunt factor includes the value in this field and the value entered in the Rectifier Output Shunt Rating (mV/A) field. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifiers > Information and Inspections grid.

Rectifier Output Volts Found (Volts) Minimum/Maximum

Minimum and maximum value allowed for data entry in the field Rectifier Output Volts Found (Volts). See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifiers > Information or Inspections grid.

Rectifier Output Volts Left (Volts)

See Rectifier Current Adjusted.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

Appendix A. Field Descriptions 263

Page 272: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Repair Priority Code that identifies how soon repair work should begin. The field accepts up to five alphanumeric characters including spaces, such as A #123. See any PCS module > Edit Data by Facility > Maintenance grid.

RFID Radio-frequency identification number populated either by transferring an Allegro Periodic Survey (PS) file to PCS or manual entry based on user security privileges.

ROW Active Use the ROW Active check box to indicate when a pipeline is active or inactive according to survey status.

When the check box is enabled in the Edit ROW Detail grid (check mark inside check box), the pipeline is not included in the Facility Survey Schedule; history records are however maintained in PCS. See Data Entry > Edit ROW Detail grid > Data View > Layout tab.

When the check box is not enabled in the Edit CP Data by Facility, Route, or Schedule grid (empty check box), the pipeline is unavailable when using the scheduling feature – pipeline history is however maintained in PCS. See any module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Information grid > Data View > Layout tab.

Series Number Use Series Number to adjust or shift milepost numbers for a pipeline when adding a pipeline extension, re-routing a pipeline, or designating two pipelines as parallel lines. The calculated milepost number resulting from a Series Number is referred to as Relative Milepost. See CPDM module Data Entry > Pipeline Series.

Set Pressure (Psig) Maximum

Maximum set point value of pressure regulator measured as Psig (pounds per square inch-gauge). See PCM module > Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Pressure Regulators.

Set Pressure (Psig) Minimum

Minimum set point value of pressure regulator measured as Psig (pounds per square inch-gauge). See PCM module > Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Pressure Regulators.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

264 Appendix A. Field Descriptions

Page 273: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Shorted Crossing Check box to indicate if a crossing has been shorted. Click to place a check mark inside the check box if the crossing is shorted. To enable the field for data entry: (1) add and enable the field Record Shorted Crossing in the Crossings Information grid; (2) then add the field Shorted Crossings in the Inspections grid. See PLSM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Crossings.

Signal Strength Signal strength of the voltage gradient (IR drop) at survey points along the pipeline as measured in millivolts (mV) by a voltmeter during a DCVG field survey. See ISM module > Data Entry > Edit Indirect Survey Data > DCVG.

Soil Resistivity Field for recording electromagnetic, soil resistivity measurements on the pipeline. Measurements are in Ohm-centimeters as indicated during the field survey by the inspection tool. See ISM module > Data Entry > Edit Indirect Survey Data > DCVG.

South P/S (Volts) Structure reading in volts when a half-cell is placed near the east side of a tank. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Tanks > Information and Inspections grid.

South P/S (Volts) Maximum and Minimum

Upper and lower limit of a range of values allowed when entering a structure reading in the South P/S (Volts) field. See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Tanks > Information grid.

SRB (Ppm) Amount of sulfate-reducing bacteria (SRB) measured as parts per million (Ppm).

To enable the field for data entry, (1) add and enable the field Record SRB (Ppm) in the Samples Information grid; (2) then add SRB (Ppm) in the Inspections grid. See ICM module > Data Entry > Edit Internal Corrosion Data by Facility > Samples > Information and Inspections grid.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

Appendix A. Field Descriptions 265

Page 274: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Start Date Survey start date. A survey Start Date and End Date is required when setting up Survey Folder Maintenance. See any module > Data Entry > Survey Folder Maintenance.

Station Marker See Milepost.

Station Number See Milepost.

Strength A user-calculated numeric value that identifies the remaining strength of a corroded pipe using a calculation method other than the one used in the B31G field, such as the RSTRENG method (remaining strength).

See ILIM module > Data Entry > Edit In-line Inspection Data by Facility > In-Line Inspection tab.

Structure IRF (Volts) Potential of the pipe, relative to the soil, with interrupted rectifier current.

Add the field Record Structure IRF (Volts) and enable the check box in the Test Point Information grid. This enables the field Structure IRF (Volts) for data entry in the Inspections grid.

See CPDM module Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Information and Inspections grid.

Structure P/S (Volts) Potential of the pipe relative to the soil.

Add the field Record Structure P/S (Volts) and enable the check box in the Test Point Information grid. This enables the field Structure P/S (Volts) for data entry in the Inspections grid.

See CPDM module > Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Test Points Inspections grid.

Surface Area Total surface area of the pipeline. See any module > Data Entry > Edit ROW Detail.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

266 Appendix A. Field Descriptions

Page 275: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Surface Condition Surface condition of the pipeline. See LSM module > Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Maintenance grid.

Surface Covering Type of coating or covering on the pipeline. See LSM module > Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Maintenance grid.

Survey Identifies which survey folder readings belong to except for periodic survey readings. Use the fields Periodic Survey and Periodic Survey Year for periodic survey readings. See CPDM module > Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Inspections grid.

Survey Remarks Survey comment associated with a facility, anomaly, or landmark. See any module > Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Inspections grid.

Tap Settings Coarse or fine tap settings for rectifier output adjustment, such as C2F3.

Add the field Record Tap Settings and enable the check box in the Rectifiers Information grid. This enables the field Tap Settings for data entry in the Inspections grid.

See CPDM module > Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Rectifiers Information and Inspections grid.

User IR Correction When a value is entered in User IR Correction, PCS uses the value to calculate Target P/S instead of using the absolute difference between Structure P/S and Structure IRF.

See CPDM module > Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Test Points Inspections grid.

Valve Coating Condition of valve coating at inspection. See VM module > Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Inspections grid.

Valve Condition General condition of valve at inspection. See VM module > Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Inspections grid.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

Appendix A. Field Descriptions 267

Page 276: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Valve Operated Check box for indicating if the valve was manually operated. See VM module > Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Inspections grid.

Valve Pass/Fail Status of the valve after inspection. See VM module > Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Inspections grid.

Valve Secured Check box for indicating if the value was left secured. See VM module > Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Inspections grid.

Valve Type Type of valve such as block or plug. See VM module > Data Entry > Edit Data by Facility > Inspections grid.

Visual Depth Numeric value entered in decimal inches as measured at the dig site to indicate the depth of an anomaly (such as corrosion, dent, scratch, or pit). See ILIM module > Data Entry > Edit In-line Inspection Data by Facility > Visual Sites tab.

Visual Depth Percentage Numeric value entered as a percentage to indicate the depth of an anomaly as measured at the dig site. See ILIM module > Data Entry > Edit In-line Inspection Data by Facility > Visual Sites tab.

Visual Feature Grade List of grades associated with the field Visual Feature Name. Vendor-dependent. Data in this field is also used to graph data for Visual Feature Name. See ILIM module > Data Entry > Edit In-line Inspection Data by Facility > Visual Sites tab.

Visual Feature Name Generic name such as weld, anomaly, valve, or bend that can be used to group features of the same type. Data in this field is also used to graph feature data. See ILIM module > Data Entry > Edit In-line Inspection Data by Facility > Visual Sites tab.

Visual Length Length of a feature in inches as measured at the dig site, typically for an anomaly. See ILIM module > Data Entry > Edit In-line Inspection Data by Facility > Visual Sites tab.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

268 Appendix A. Field Descriptions

Page 277: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Visual Orientation Clock (o’clock) orientation of documented feature as found at the dig site. The position of the feature on the pipe at 12:00 o’clock refers to the top of the pipe; 3:00 o’clock refers to the right side of the pipe in the forward direction of the ILI tool; 6:00 o’clock refers to the bottom of the pipe; and 9:00 o’clock refers to the left side of the pipe in the forward direction of the ILI tool. See ILIM module > Data Entry > Edit In-line Inspection Data by Facility > Visual Sites tab.

Visual PRF Numeric field for entering the visual inspection PRF (pressure reduction factor) based on the vendor import of the remaining strength calculation.

Table A-1. Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Name Description

Appendix A. Field Descriptions 269

Page 278: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Notes

270 Appendix A. Field Descriptions

Page 279: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

B

FAQs

This chapter provides answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs) about PCS. If you have a question not covered in this chapter, contact Technical Services at [email protected].

Topics include those in the following list:

• Is the field “Effective IR Correction (Volts)” used for IR drop corrections?

• How does PCS calculate Target Structure P/S and Target Structure IRF? (page 272)

• What causes “Error Exception C0000005” when starting PCS? (page 275)

Is the field “Effective IR Correction (Volts)” used for IR drop corrections? PCS fields that include Effective in the description are calculated fields. PCS populates these fields when data is entered in other fields.

For example, PCS populates and updates Effective Structure IRF (Volts) when a value is entered in Structure IRF (Volts). If data is entered in Structure IRF (Volts) only once every 3 years, Effective Structure IRF (Volts) displays the last data entered until it is updated. The same is true for the fields Effective Native P/S (Volts), Effective Native Date, Effective IR Correction (Volts), and Effective IR Correction Date.

In the first figure below, Effective IR Correction (Volts) is a calculated field showing the difference between Structure P/S (Volts) and Structure IRF (Volts) as measured during the survey. The Effective IR Correction Date displays the Inspection Date. Both fields will show this data until new data is entered.

271

Page 280: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

User IR Correction is an inspection field for entering IR drop if it is known. It overrides the calculated IR drop between the values for Structure P/S (Volts) and Structure IRF (Volts) and also changes Target Structure P/S (Volts) to reflect the known User IR Correction. See the example in the next figure.

How does PCS calculate Target Structure P/S and Target Structure IRF? PCS calculates Target Structure P/S (Volts) and Target Structure IRF (Volts) based on your selection for Test Point Protection Criteria in the Information grid. An example is shown in the next figure. Also refer to Table B-1 (page 273) and Table B-2 (page 274).

272 Appendix B. FAQs

Page 281: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Table B-1. Protection Criteria for Calculating Target Structure P/S (Volts)

Select this Protection Criterion...

For this Target Structure P/S Calculation (On Reading)

.85 IRF –0.850 – |Structure P/S (Volts) – Structure IRF (Volts)|

Example: –0.850 – |–1.200 – –0.800| = –1.250

The value in the User IR Correction field (if any) is used instead of the |Structure P/S (Volts) – Structure IRF (Volts)| equation.

.85 On (default) –0.850V

100mV Native P/S (Volts) – 0.100 – |Structure P/S (Volts) – Structure IRF (Volts)|

Example: –0.550 – 0.100 – |–1.200 – –0.800| = –1.050

The fields Native P/S (Volts) and Native Date can be included with any survey regardless of how old. The system finds the most recent native reading and date, and the most recent pair of structure on/off readings [Structure P/S (Volts) and Structure IRF (Volts)].

This means if the current-year survey includes only on readings, PCS will use the last on/off readings and native date. This is the case until a new set of on/off readings is taken.

300mV No longer recognized by NACE RP0169 or DOT regulations.

Ag/AgC1 Functions the same as .85 On but uses –0.800V instead. Use this protection criteria for off-shore (saltwater) or tank on-readings when using silver/silver chloride half cell.

Ref Read Enable the Test Point Reference P/S field in the Add/Remove Grid Columns window when using the Ref Read (reference reading) protection criteria.

Appendix B. FAQs 273

Page 282: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Target Structure IRF (Volts) is used with facilities to meet criteria and to calculate a minimum Structure IRF (Volts) value.

Table B-2. Protection Criteria for Calculating Target Structure P/S (Volts)

Select this Protection Criterion...

For this Target Structure IRF (Volts) Calculation (Off Reading)

.85 IRF (off) and 100mV

Structure IRF (Volts) can be compared to Target Structure IRF (Volts) to determine if the inspection is in compliance.

If Structure IRF (Volts) is more negative than Target Structure IRF (Volts), the test point is in compliance.

Calculation for 100mV criteria is as follows:

• Target Structure IRF (Volts) = Native P/S (Volts) – 0.1.

The field Native Date must be enabled in Add/Remove Grid Columns.

• Target Structure P/S (Volts) is calculated for an inspection that includes a Structure IRF (Volts).

• Native P/S (Volts) = most recent native before the Structure P/S (Volts) and Structure IRF (Volts) inspection date.

Calculation for .85 IRF criteria is as follows:

• Target Structure IRF (Volts) = –.85

• Target Structure P/S (Volts) is calculated for an inspection that includes a Structure IRF (Volts).

.85 On Calculation: Target Structure IRF (Volts) = Null

300mV Calculation: Target Structure IRF (Volts) = Null

Ref Read Calculation: Target Structure P/S (Volts) = Null

274 Appendix B. FAQs

Page 283: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

What causes “Error Exception C0000005” when starting PCS? Error exception C0000005 is a result of a version mismatch of the VFP runtime file labeled “vfp9r.dll”. The error message displays when starting PCS 7 on a Windows Vista or higher computer (Figure B-1).

PCS 7 requires version 9.0.0.3504 of the “vfp9r.dll” runtime file. Depending on your operating system, this file is located in the following directory on your computer:

• For a 32-bit operating system, the “vfp9r.dll” runtime file is located at: C:\Program Files\Common Files\microsoft shared\VFP

• For a 64-bit operating system, the “vfp9r.dll” runtime file is located at: C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\microsoft shared\VFP

Figure B-1. Error Exception C0000005

To determine if you are running a 32- or 64-bit computer, follow these steps:

1 For a Windows Vista computer:

a Click Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > System.

b View the information in the System field.

2 For a Windows 7 computer:

a Click Start > Control Panel > System and Security > System.

b View the information in the field System type.

Appendix B. FAQs 275

Page 284: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

To verify the version of the “vfp9r.dll” runtime file and replace it with the correct version if required, follow these steps:

1 Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the VFP directory using one of the following directory paths:

• For a 32-bit operating system navigate to: C:\Program Files\Common Files\microsoft shared\VFP

• For a 64-bit operating system navigate to: C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\microsoft shared\VFP

2 Right-click the vfp9r.dll runtime file and select Properties in the shortcut menu that opens.

3 Click the Details tab. Verify Product version 9.0.0.3504 displays in the vfp9r.dll Properties window as shown in the following figure (Figure B-2). If a different version is shown, continue with step 4 to install the correct version.

If your computer is using the correct version of the “vfp9r.dll” file and you are still unable to start PCS, please contact PCS Technical Services for assistance at 1-800-229-3404 (select 1, then press 2).

Figure B-2. VFP9R.dll Property Sheet

276 Appendix B. FAQs

Page 285: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

4 Complete the following steps if your computer is running an incorrect version of the “vfp9r.dll” runtime file:

a Remove the “vfp9r.dll” runtime file from the VFP folder.

b Load the PCS installation CD in the CD/DVD drive of your computer.

c Double-click the setup.exe file and then click Next.

d Select the Repair option and then click Next (Figure B-3).

e Click Install. When the installation process completes, click Finish.

f Start PCS to confirm the software now starts without displaying the “Error Exception C000005” message.

If you continue to have problems, please contact PCS Technical Services for assistance at 1-800-229-3404 (select 1, then press 2).

Figure B-3. PCS Installation CD

Appendix B. FAQs 277

Page 286: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Notes

278 Appendix B. FAQs

Page 287: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

Index

Symbols# of Current Distributions 243

AAC input 243AC power (watts) 244AC service 244Account 244Active 264Add new node

pipeline segment 31Address 245Address pre-direction 245Allegro

scheduling 120timed readings 131

American Innovations 15APB (Ppm) 246Apparatus used 246Apparent leak location 246Average P/S 246

BB31G 246Blue text

schedule settings 116Bond current adjusted 247Bond current found (amps) 247Bond current left (amps) 247Bond shunt factor (A/mV) 247, 248Bond type 248Bridge

definition name 150, 154, 157export 14external ID 149import 14import export data 147

import file 148import transition file 150system settings 147

Bridge preview 162Bridge preview filter 162Bullhorn client ID 15Bullhorn FTP 15

CCaptions

unit of measure 23Casing criteria 17Casing IRF (Volts) 248Casing IRF (Volts) Maximum 248Casing IRF (Volts) Minimum 248Casing P/S (Volts) 248Casing P/S (Volts) Maximum 249Casing P/S (Volts) Minimum 249Casing status 249Census date 249Center P/S (Volts) 249Center P/S (Volts) Maximum 249Center P/S (Volts) Minimum 249City 249Close Direction 250Coating 250Coating condition 250Coke breeze 250Column headings

fonts and colors 97Comparisons report 205Conductivity 250Connection type 250Contact 250Critical bond 251Crossing type 251

279

Page 288: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Current demand 251Current density 251Current density report 207Current distribution (percentage) 251Custom input mask 25

DData collection report 204Database

master 225replica 225

Decibel reading (dB) 251Default location format 31, 33

location ID 35milepost 3 decimals 34milepost 4 decimals 34miles station number 35reading number 34station number 35

Definition nameBridge 150, 154, 157

Depth 252Diameter 252Diode rating 252Due date from schedule 252

EEast P/S 252East P/S (Volts) Minimum 252Effective date 253Efficiency 253Elevation (Feet) 253Email account

notifications 85Email client 85Email notification 83

dedicated email account 85email client 85events 88recipients 86

E-mail notification generator 19E-mail reports 18Enabled expression 50

Event reportscriteria violations 84email notifications 84

Exceptions report 205Export data 147

system settings 254Export setting

system settings 254Expressions

defining 48editor 48enabled 50

External IDUDF 149

FFacility active 254Facility delinquent date 254Facility ID 254Field captions

custom settings 57default settings 57

Fields and UDFs 45Font styles

column headings 97Forms 95FTP 15

GGalvanic anode initial current 254Galvanic anode shunt factor (A/mV) 254Galvanic anode size (lbs.) 254Galvanic anode to soil (volts) 255Galvanic anode type 255Galvanic current (amps) maximum 255Galvanic current (amps) minimum 255Galvanic number of anodes 255Gas indicator leak test 255Grids and forms 95

HHierarchy 8

pipeline segment 31

280 Index

Page 289: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Hierarchy levels 8, 26, 255

IImport data 147Import transition file 150Inactive facilities 23Input mask

custom 25Inspection elevation 138Inspection GPS accuracy 138Inspection GPS difference 138, 139Inspection latitude 138Inspection longitude 138Inspections report 205Insulator shunt factor (A/mV) 257IR (Percentage) 257

LLocation code 258Location ID 35

MMaintenance report 205Master database 225Metric mode 23Milepost 258

end location 38start location 38

Milepost marker 258Miles+100 feet 35Modules 2Months between surveys 114My favorite reports 218

NNegative shunt factor (A/mV) 258Number of crossings 258Number of leaks 258Number of negatives 258Number of turns 259

OOriginal milepost 259

OTL to remote earth 259

PP/S offset 259Parallel lines 25Parallel pipeline 31PBN dial reading 259PCM current 259PCS delinquency report 203PCS inspections graph 203PCS modules 2Pending due dates report 84Periodic survey 260Periodic survey year 260Permanent comments 260Phone number 260Pipeline segment

add new node 31creating new 31default location format 31hierarchy 31parallel pipeline 31

Pipeline series 72, 264create and apply 72

Plot facility 260Plot this point 260Polarity 260Potentials

positive polarity 22Power company phone number 261Pre-Install P/S 261Pressure reduction factor

PRF 257, 269PRF

pressure reduction factor 257, 269Property rights 261

RRange checking 50Range data 38, 39Range violations report 84Reading number 34

Index 281

Page 290: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

Record cardinal points 261Record Center P/S (Volts) 261Record intercardinal points 261Record Mid P/S (Volts) 261Record secondary intercardinal points 262Rectifier anode size 262Rectifier anode type 262Rectifier current adjusted 262, 263Rectifier output current found (amps) 263Rectifier output current found (amps)maximum 263Rectifier output current found (amps)minimum 263Rectifier output current left (amps) 263Rectifier output shunt factor (A/mV) 263Rectifier output volts left (volts) 263Repair Priority 264Replica

remote workstation 226synchronizing 228

Replica database 225Reports

comparisons 205data collection 204delinquency 203exceptions 205inspections graph 203my favorite 218schedule 204signature line 29test points 204

RFID 264Routes

Allegro timed readings 131ROW active 264

SSchedule

Allegro 120criteria 114data entry 119grace period 113print 117

survey frequency 114survey period 113

Schedules 113, 123Security

hierarchical 30, 60setup groups 62system 60

Set pressure maximum (Psig) 264Set pressure minimum (Psig) 264Shorted crossing 265Signal strength 265Signature line 29Site string 126, 135, 143Soil resistivity 265South P/S (volts) 265South P/S (volts) maximum and minimum265SRB (Ppm) 265Start date 266Station marker 266Station number 266Strength 266Structure IRF 266Structure P/S (volts) 266Surface area 266Surface condition 267Surface covering 267Survey 267Survey remarks 260, 267Survey report 204System settings 11

TTap settings 267Technical services 5Themes 75Timed readings 131Transition file

bridge 148Two-way replication

server path 27

282 Index

Page 291: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

UUDF

external ID 149UNC

uniform naming convention 226Unit of measure

captions 23User IR Correction 267User location name 24User-defined fields 45

VValidation tables 58

Valve coating 267Valve condition 267Valve operated 268Valve Pass/Fail 268Valve secured 268Valve type 268Visual depth 268Visual depth percentage 268Visual feature grade 268Visual feature name 268Visual length 268Visual orientation 269

Index 283

Page 292: PCS 7.6.1 CPDM Admin/Users Guide

PCS CPDM User and Administrator Guide

284 Index